Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Operations Research

2,338 missions · 1,114 completed

The discipline of applying mathematical analysis to complex decision problems in operations: allocating scarce resources, scheduling, routing, inventory, and the design of service and production systems. Drawing on mathematical programming, stochastic modeling, queueing, simulation, and game-theoretic reasoning, it seeks policies that perform provably well in systems shaped by constraints, congestion, and uncertainty.

Missions

Open1224Completed1114All2338
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov ChainOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment II: With a Fixed Order Cost, a World-Dependent (r, S) Policy Is Optimal and Lies within Veinott-Type BoundsResearch Paper

Motivation

Demand for many products is not stationary: it rises and falls with the economy, the season, a product's life cycle or a customer's state. Song and Zipkin (1993) (DOI 10.1287/opre.41.2.351) model this by a world-driven demand process: an exogenous Markov chain AAA (the "state of the world") whose current state sets the rate of a Poisson demand stream. The model contains the classical stationary inventory model as the case of one world state, and it is a standard example of a Markov-modulated decision problem in operations research.

For stationary demand with a fixed order cost, optimal (s,S)(s, S)(s,S) policies go back to Scarf (1960) for finite horizons and Iglehart (1963) for the infinite horizon; Veinott (1966) bounded the optimal parameters by quantities computed from the one-period cost alone. This mission formalizes the extension of both results to the fluctuating-demand model (§3.2 of the paper). A companion mission treats the linear order-cost case, in which a world-dependent basestock policy is optimal.

Setting

The world AAA is a continuous-time Markov chain on a countable set III with generator (qij)(q_{ij})(qij​), qi=−qii=∑j≠iqijq_i = -q_{ii} = \sum_{j\neq i} q_{ij}qi​=−qii​=∑j=i​qij​, and bounded rates. While A=iA = iA=i, unit demands arrive at Poisson rate λi\lambda_iλi​; shortages are backlogged. An order arrives after a random lead time LLL, independent of the world and the demand. The inventory position x∈Zx \in \mathbb Zx∈Z is on-hand stock minus backorders plus stock on order.

Costs: a fixed cost Kˉ\bar KKˉ per order and a unit cost cˉ\bar ccˉ, both paid on arrival; a holding cost rate h>0h > 0h>0 and a penalty cost rate p>0p > 0p>0; a discount rate α>0\alpha > 0α>0. With F~L(α)=E[e−αL]\tilde F_L(\alpha) = E[e^{-\alpha L}]F~L​(α)=E[e−αL], the discounted costs are c=cˉF~L(α)c = \bar c\tilde F_L(\alpha)c=cˉF~L​(α) and K=KˉF~L(α)K = \bar K\tilde F_L(\alpha)K=KˉF~L​(α). If DLiD^i_LDLi​ is the demand during a lead time from world state iii and C^(x)=max⁡{−px,hx}\hat C(x) = \max\{-px, hx\}C^(x)=max{−px,hx},

C(i,y)=E[e−αLC^(y−DLi)].C(i, y) = E\big[e^{-\alpha L}\hat C(y - D^i_L)\big].C(i,y)=E[e−αLC^(y−DLi​)].

Uniformization at a rate μ≥sup⁡iqi+sup⁡iλi\mu \ge \sup_i q_i + \sup_i\lambda_iμ≥supi​qi​+supi​λi​ turns the problem into a discrete-time dynamic program with β=1/(μ+α)\beta = 1/(\mu+\alpha)β=1/(μ+α), γ=βμ\gamma = \beta\muγ=βμ and the myopic cost G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y)G^+(i, y) = (1-\gamma)cy + \beta C(i, y)G+(i,y)=(1−γ)cy+βC(i,y). For a terminal cost W0W_0W0​ the nnn-stage costs satisfy the recursion (10):

Wn(i,x)=min⁡y≥x{Kδ(y−x)+Gn(i,y)},W_n(i, x) = \min_{y\ge x}\{K\delta(y-x) + G_n(i, y)\},Wn​(i,x)=y≥xmin​{Kδ(y−x)+Gn​(i,y)}, Gn(i,y)=G+(i,y)+βλic+β{λiWn−1(i,y−1)+∑j≠iqijWn−1(j,y)+(μ−λi−qi)Wn−1(i,y)},G_n(i, y) = G^+(i, y) + \beta\lambda_i c + \beta\Big\{\lambda_i W_{n-1}(i, y-1) + \sum_{j\neq i} q_{ij}W_{n-1}(j, y) + (\mu - \lambda_i - q_i)W_{n-1}(i, y)\Big\},Gn​(i,y)=G+(i,y)+βλi​c+β{λi​Wn−1​(i,y−1)+j=i∑​qij​Wn−1​(j,y)+(μ−λi​−qi​)Wn−1​(i,y)},

where δ(z)=1\delta(z) = 1δ(z)=1 if z>0z > 0z>0 and δ(0)=0\delta(0) = 0δ(0)=0. Throughout, Assumption 1, αcˉ<p\alpha\bar c < pαcˉ<p, holds and K>0K > 0K>0. The terminal cost is the optimal cost W∞W_\inftyW∞​ of the linear model (K=0K = 0K=0); its G∞G_\inftyG∞​ is written G0G_0G0​, and y∗(i)y^*(i)y∗(i) is the smallest minimizer of G0(i,⋅)G_0(i, \cdot)G0​(i,⋅).

A function f:Z→Rf : \mathbb Z \to \mathbb Rf:Z→R is KKK-convex (Definition 2) if f(x)−f(x−b)ba+f(x)≤f(x+a)+K\frac{f(x)-f(x-b)}{b}a + f(x) \le f(x+a) + Kbf(x)−f(x−b)​a+f(x)≤f(x+a)+K for all xxx and all integers a,b>0a, b > 0a,b>0. The (r,S)(r, S)(r,S) policy with parameters {(r(i),S(i))}\{(r(i), S(i))\}{(r(i),S(i))} orders up to S(i)S(i)S(i) when x≤r(i)x \le r(i)x≤r(i) and the world is in state iii, and does not order otherwise. With y+(i)y^+(i)y+(i) the smallest minimizer of G+(i,⋅)G^+(i,\cdot)G+(i,⋅) and ymin⁡+=min⁡iy+(i)y^+_{\min} = \min_i y^+(i)ymin+​=mini​y+(i), the paper defines

S+(i)=min⁡{y≥y+(i):G+(i,y)−G+(i,y+(i))>γK},r+(i)=max⁡{y<y+(i):G+(i,y)−G+(i,y+(i))>(1−γ)K},r−(i)=max⁡{y<y∗(i):G0(i,y)−G0(i,y∗(i))>K},r−−(i)=max⁡{y<ymin⁡+:G+(i,y)−G+(i,ymin⁡+)>K}.\begin{aligned} S^+(i) &= \min\{y \ge y^+(i) : G^+(i, y) - G^+(i, y^+(i)) > \gamma K\},\\ r^+(i) &= \max\{y < y^+(i) : G^+(i, y) - G^+(i, y^+(i)) > (1-\gamma)K\},\\ r^-(i) &= \max\{y < y^*(i) : G_0(i, y) - G_0(i, y^*(i)) > K\},\\ r^{--}(i) &= \max\{y < y^+_{\min} : G^+(i, y) - G^+(i, y^+_{\min}) > K\}. \end{aligned}S+(i)r+(i)r−(i)r−−(i)​=min{y≥y+(i):G+(i,y)−G+(i,y+(i))>γK},=max{y<y+(i):G+(i,y)−G+(i,y+(i))>(1−γ)K},=max{y<y∗(i):G0​(i,y)−G0​(i,y∗(i))>K},=max{y<ymin+​:G+(i,y)−G+(i,ymin+​)>K}.​

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorems 5(e) and 6

Let Sn∗(i)S^*_n(i)Sn∗​(i) be the smallest minimizer of Gn(i,⋅)G_n(i,\cdot)Gn​(i,⋅) and rn∗(i)r^*_n(i)rn∗​(i) the largest y<Sn∗(i)y < S^*_n(i)y<Sn∗​(i) with Gn(i,y)>K+Gn(i,Sn∗(i))G_n(i, y) > K + G_n(i, S^*_n(i))Gn​(i,y)>K+Gn​(i,Sn∗​(i)). For every iii the sequence (rn∗(i),Sn∗(i))(r^*_n(i), S^*_n(i))(rn∗​(i),Sn∗​(i)) has limit points; for any choice of limit points (r∗(i),S∗(i))(r^*(i), S^*(i))(r∗(i),S∗(i)), the world-dependent (r,S)(r, S)(r,S) policy with these parameters is optimal for the infinite-horizon discounted problem, and

y∗(i)≤S∗(i)<S+(i),r−−(i)≤r−(i)≤r∗(i)≤r+(i).y^*(i) \le S^*(i) < S^+(i),\qquad r^{--}(i) \le r^-(i) \le r^*(i) \le r^+(i).y∗(i)≤S∗(i)<S+(i),r−−(i)≤r−(i)≤r∗(i)≤r+(i).

Milestones

Lemma 4 (uniform bounds on the iterates); Theorem 3 (KKK-convexity of GnG_nGn​, WnW_nWn​ and optimality of an (r,S)(r, S)(r,S) rule for each nnn-stage problem); Lemmas 5 and 6 (difference comparisons); Theorem 4 (the bounds above for every nnn); Theorem 5(a)–(d) (convergence of WnW_nWn​, GnG_nGn​, the (r,S)(r, S)(r,S) property of limit points, and the optimality equation (2)).

Significance

The result shows that the classical (s,S)(s, S)(s,S) structure survives Markov modulation of demand with an infinite world space and stochastic lead times: a stationary policy whose two parameters depend only on the current world state is optimal over the infinite horizon. The bounds of Theorem 6 locate those parameters in an interval computed from the myopic cost G+G^+G+ and the linear model alone, uniformly in the horizon.

The results are proved in the paper, except that Theorem 5 refers to Iglehart (1963) and Lemma 4 to Song's thesis. To our knowledge none of them has a machine-checked proof. A formalization would also produce reusable machinery: KKK-convexity on the integers, the Scarf-type inductive argument with a countable world state, and the passage from finite-horizon to infinite-horizon optimality for a nonnegative-cost Markov decision process with unbounded costs.

Difficulty

The one-period cost is unbounded in xxx and the world space may be infinite, so the usual contraction argument for discounted dynamic programs does not apply. Convergence of WnW_nWn​ needs the uniform bound of Lemma 4. Optimality of the limit policy needs a separate argument, because a pointwise limit of (r,S)(r, S)(r,S) rules need not exist: the parameter sequences are only known to have limit points. The lower bounds r−r^-r− and r−−r^{--}r−− hold only because the terminal cost is the linear model's optimal cost, which makes the difference comparisons of Lemma 6 possible; the paper notes that Lemma 6 depends on this choice of W0W_0W0​.

Formalization scope

All definitions live in the namespace SongZipkinFluct.FixedCost. Inventory positions and order-up-to levels are integers. The demand law DLiD^i_LDLi​ is defined through uniformization at rate μ\muμ, as an exact series representation of the Markov-modulated Poisson count, and the lead time is a probability law on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) independent of the rest. The standing conventions h,p,α>0h, p, \alpha > 0h,p,α>0, cˉ,Kˉ≥0\bar c, \bar K \ge 0cˉ,Kˉ≥0, μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 and μ≥q∗+λ∗\mu \ge q^* + \lambda^*μ≥q∗+λ∗ are hypotheses of the model. Assumption 1 and Kˉ>0\bar K > 0Kˉ>0 are hypotheses of each theorem.

The iterates WnW_nWn​ are defined by the recursion (10), with the minimum written as an infimum over integers y≥xy \ge xy≥x. W∞W_\inftyW∞​ and G∞G_\inftyG∞​ are the suprema over nnn, which are finite and equal the limits by Lemma 4 and Theorem 3. Every minimizer and every extremal integer (y+y^+y+, ymin⁡+y^+_{\min}ymin+​, y∗y^*y∗, Sn∗S^*_nSn∗​, rn∗r^*_nrn∗​, S+S^+S+, r+r^+r+, r−r^-r−, r−−r^{--}r−−) is passed through its defining property, never through sInf/sSup on Z\mathbb ZZ. The goal also asserts that all of them exist, so its hypotheses can be met. A limit point of an integer sequence is a value taken infinitely often.

Optimality is over all deterministic history-dependent feasible policies and from every initial state. Costs are valued in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], and a policy's cost is the supremum of its finite-horizon discounted costs in the uniformized problem (1). Restricting the comparison to (r,S)(r, S)(r,S) or stationary policies would trivialize the goal and is ruled out. KKK-convexity is the integer version of Definition 2, not convexity over Z\mathbb ZZ-scalars.

Welcome contributions: KKK-convexity calculus on Z\mathbb ZZ, convergence of the uniformized demand series, Lemma 4, and an Iglehart-type limit argument for countable-state Markov decision processes with nonnegative costs.

Selected references

  • J.-S. Song and P. Zipkin, Inventory Control in a Fluctuating Demand Environment, Operations Research 41(2):351–370, 1993. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.41.2.351
  • H. Scarf, The Optimality of (S, s) Policies in the Dynamic Inventory Problem, in Mathematical Methods in the Social Sciences, Stanford University Press, 1960.
  • D. L. Iglehart, Optimality of (s, S) Policies in the Infinite Horizon Dynamic Inventory Problem, Management Science 9(2):259–267, 1963. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.9.2.259
  • A. F. Veinott, Jr., On the Optimality of (s, S) Inventory Policies: New Conditions and a New Proof, SIAM Journal on Applied Mathematics 14(5):1067–1083, 1966. https://doi.org/10.1137/0114086
  • D. P. Bertsekas and S. E. Shreve, Stochastic Optimal Control: The Discrete-Time Case, Academic Press, 1978.
14 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Ordering and Rationing Policies in a Nonstationary Dynamic Inventory Model with n Demand Classes III: Under Full Backlogging, Class-j Rationing Levels Ignore Lower-Class Penalties and DemandsResearch Paper

Motivation

A single stock of one product often serves customers of different importance: emergency and routine orders for spare parts, contract and spot customers, high- and low-priority patients for a blood bank. When stock runs low, the question is not only how much to order but how much of the remaining stock to hand to the less important customers now, and how much to hold back for more important demand that may still arrive. Stock rationing policies answer this question with critical rationing levels: demand of a class is served only while the stock stays above that class's level.

Topkis (1968) studied this problem as a finite-horizon dynamic program with nnn demand classes, nonstationary costs and demands, and an arbitrary degree of backlogging. His Theorem 1 shows that, when each interval has either complete backlogging or none, a policy given by critical levels zˉt1≥⋯≥zˉtn\bar z_t^1 \ge \dots \ge \bar z_t^nzˉt1​≥⋯≥zˉtn​ is optimal. This mission concerns his Theorem 3, which treats the case of complete backlogging: the critical levels of a class do not depend on what happens in the classes below it.

Timeline. Veinott (1965) considered nnn demand classes but imposed the policy with all critical levels equal to 000. Topkis's 1966 report treated n=2n = 2n=2, partially duplicated independently by Evans (1968) and by Kaplan's 1966 report "Stock Rationing", in which, according to Topkis, the result of Theorem 3 was used implicitly. Topkis (1968) extended the analysis to nnn classes and stated Theorem 3 explicitly.

Setting

A period is divided into kkk intervals, indexed backwards: interval ttt is followed by t−1t - 1t−1 further intervals, and interval kkk is the first. There are nnn demand classes; class nnn is the most important. In interval ttt a random demand vector dt=(dt1,…,dtn)≥0d_t = (d_t^1, \dots, d_t^n) \ge 0dt​=(dt1​,…,dtn​)≥0 with law μt\mu_tμt​ and finite means arrives; demands in different intervals are independent. Given the stock zzz and the outstanding demand B=b+dtB = b + d_tB=b+dt​ (backlog bbb plus new demand), the decision is the vector uuu, 0≤u≤B0 \le u \le B0≤u≤B, of demand left unsatisfied; the stock drops to w=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0w = z - \mathbf 1 \cdot (B - u) \ge 0w=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0. A penalty pt⋅up_t \cdot upt​⋅u and a holding cost ht(w)h_t(w)ht​(w) are charged, and the backlog carried into the next interval is atua_t uat​u, with at=1a_t = 1at​=1 for complete backlogging. At the end of the period a salvage cost g0(z,b)=v1(z)+v2(z−1⋅b)g_0(z, b) = v_1(z) + v_2(z - \mathbf 1 \cdot b)g0​(z,b)=v1​(z)+v2​(z−1⋅b) is charged.

The standing assumptions are: hth_tht​ convex and continuous on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞); v1v_1v1​ convex and continuous on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞); v2v_2v2​ convex and continuous on R\mathbb RR with lim⁡w→−∞D+v2(w)>−∞\lim_{w \to -\infty} D^+ v_2(w) > -\inftylimw→−∞​D+v2​(w)>−∞; and 0≤pt1≤⋯≤ptn0 \le p_t^1 \le \dots \le p_t^n0≤pt1​≤⋯≤ptn​. The minimal expected cost satisfies the recursion (1):

ft(z,B)=inf⁡0≤u≤Bw=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0[pt⋅u+ht(w)+gt−1(w,atu)],gt(z,b)=E ft(z,b+dt).f_t(z, B) = \inf_{\substack{0 \le u \le B \\ w = z - \mathbf 1\cdot(B-u) \ge 0}} \big[p_t \cdot u + h_t(w) + g_{t-1}(w, a_t u)\big], \qquad g_t(z, b) = \mathbb E\, f_t(z, b + d_t).ft​(z,B)=0≤u≤Bw=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0​inf​[pt​⋅u+ht​(w)+gt−1​(w,at​u)],gt​(z,b)=Eft​(z,b+dt​).

With δj\delta_jδj​ the jjj-th unit vector, the critical rationing level zˉtj\bar z_t^jzˉtj​ is +∞+\infty+∞ if w↦ptjw+ht(w)+gt−1(w,atwδj)w \mapsto p_t^j w + h_t(w) + g_{t-1}(w, a_t w \delta_j)w↦ptj​w+ht​(w)+gt−1​(w,at​wδj​) is strictly decreasing on [0,∞)[0, \infty)[0,∞), and is the smallest minimizer of that function on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) otherwise. D+D^+D+ denotes a right derivative.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3

Assume at+1=at=⋯=a1=1a_{t+1} = a_t = \dots = a_1 = 1at+1​=at​=⋯=a1​=1 and that the demands of different classes are independent in each interval. Fix a class jjj. Then for two instances of the model that differ only in the penalties pimp_i^mpim​ of the classes m≤j−1m \le j - 1m≤j−1 and in the demand distributions of the classes m≤jm \le jm≤j,

(a) the marginal quantities

Dz+gt(z,zδj)andDε+gt(w,ε(δj−δs)+b)∣ε=0(s>j, bs>0)D_z^+ g_t(z, z\delta_j) \quad\text{and}\quad D_\varepsilon^+ g_t\big(w, \varepsilon(\delta_j - \delta_s) + b\big)\big|_{\varepsilon = 0} \quad (s > j,\ b^s > 0)Dz+​gt​(z,zδj​)andDε+​gt​(w,ε(δj​−δs​)+b)​ε=0​(s>j, bs>0)

coincide, and

(b) the critical rationing levels zˉt+1j\bar z_{t+1}^jzˉt+1j​ coincide.

Milestones

  1. The claim in the proof of Theorem 3 (p. 173): for j<sj < sj<s and Bs>0B^s > 0Bs>0, Dε+gt(z,ε(δj−δs)+B)∣ε=0D_\varepsilon^+ g_t(z, \varepsilon(\delta_j - \delta_s) + B)|_{\varepsilon=0}Dε+​gt​(z,ε(δj​−δs​)+B)∣ε=0​ is independent of B1,…,BjB^1, \dots, B^jB1,…,Bj.
  2. Theorem 3 (a) on its own, from which the page derives (b).

Significance

The result. Theorem 3 reduces the size of the problem. Under complete backlogging, class 1 demand does not influence any critical rationing level, and the class-jjj critical levels can be found from a problem with only the n−j+1n - j + 1n−j+1 classes j,…,nj, \dots, nj,…,n, with a degenerate demand distribution for class jjj. Since computing the levels requires tabulating functions of several variables, which Topkis calls prohibitive for large nnn, this is the observation that makes the levels of the most important classes computable.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved in the paper by a short sketch that points to two case formulas, (16) and (17), to Theorem 1 (c), and to an interchange of expectation and right derivative. A machine-checked proof would supply the induction, the case analysis and the interchange in full. No formalization of any part of Topkis's paper is known: the result is proved on paper, not formalized.

Difficulty

The obvious argument is an induction on ttt showing that gtg_tgt​ itself does not depend on the lower classes. It fails: gtg_tgt​ does depend on the penalties and demands of every class, since lower-class demand is still served and penalized. Only certain directional derivatives are invariant, and these derivatives depend on the critical levels of every class l≥jl \ge jl≥j and on the optimal rationing decision, which themselves change from one instance to the other unless the invariance is already known for the previous interval. The derivatives are one-sided, may be −∞-\infty−∞ at the boundary, and must be passed through an expectation.

Formalization scope

The Lean development, in namespace TopkisRation.Backlog, fixes these conventions:

  • classes are Fin n (class jjj of the paper is index j−1j-1j−1); intervals are natural numbers counted backwards; vectors are ordered pointwise;
  • ftf_tft​ is defined by the recursion (1), with sInf for the infimum and the Bochner integral for E\mathbb EE, and every statement restricts to z≥0z \ge 0z≥0, b≥0b \ge 0b≥0;
  • D+D^+D+ is an extended-real right derivative (a liminf of difference quotients); Dz+gt(z,zδj)D_z^+ g_t(z, z\delta_j)Dz+​gt​(z,zδj​) is the derivative along the ray in which the stock and the class-jjj backlog move together;
  • zˉtj\bar z_t^jzˉtj​ takes values in R∪{+∞}\mathbb R \cup \{+\infty\}R∪{+∞} and is specified by a predicate (smallest minimizer, or +∞+\infty+∞ for a strictly decreasing function), never by a real sInf;
  • the limit in (B) is read as "D+v2D^+ v_2D+v2​ is bounded below";
  • independence of the classes in interval iii is independence of the coordinate maps under μi\mu_iμi​.

"Does not depend on" is stated with two instances MMM, M′M'M′ that agree on every datum the conclusion uses except the freed ones: the same kkk, v1v_1v1​, v2v_2v2​, the same hih_ihi​ and the same pimp_i^mpim​ for m≥jm \ge jm≥j in intervals i≤t+1i \le t+1i≤t+1, and the same class-mmm marginal law for m>jm > jm>j in every interval. The penalty of class jjj itself is not freed. Data of intervals beyond t+1t+1t+1 and the ordering cost are unconstrained. Part (b) is stated for arbitrary critical levels of the two instances; existence of critical levels is part of the paper's §1 and is not assumed away, so (b) is not vacuous. The goal does not assume the p. 173 claim, the case formulas (16)–(17), or Theorem 1. Encoding "does not depend" as "is a function of the remaining data" is ruled out.

Needed infrastructure: one-sided derivatives of convex functions and their monotone limits, interchange of right derivative and expectation for convex integrands, and the convexity and rationing-policy results of §1 (Theorem 1, Lemma 2). These are reusable for the other missions of this series. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, a formal version of (16)–(17), and the existence of critical levels.

Selected references

  • D. M. Topkis, Optimal ordering and rationing policies in a nonstationary dynamic inventory model with n demand classes, Management Science 15(3):160–176, 1968. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.15.3.160
  • A. F. Veinott Jr., Optimal policy in a dynamic, single product, nonstationary inventory model with several demand classes, Operations Research 13(5):761–778, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.13.5.761
  • R. V. Evans, Sales and restocking policies in a single item inventory system, Management Science 14(7):463–472, 1968. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.14.7.463
  • A. Kaplan, Stock Rationing, report, December 1966 (reference [4] of Topkis 1968).
5 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Optimal Ordering and Rationing Policies in a Nonstationary Dynamic Inventory Model with n Demand Classes II: Without Backlogging, the Critical Rationing Levels Are Nondecreasing in tResearch Paper

Motivation

A firm that holds a single stock of one product often faces demand from several classes of customers that differ in importance: emergency and routine orders for spare parts, contract and spot customers, high- and low-priority users of a military supply system. When stock runs low it can pay to refuse a less important demand now in order to keep stock for a more important demand that may arrive later. Veinott (Operations Research 13 (1965), 761–778) studied a dynamic inventory model with several demand classes but required the specific policy that serves every class whenever stock is available. Topkis (Management Science 15 (1968), 160–176) treated the dynamic version, in which demands arrive over the intervals of a period between two procurements, and showed that the optimal rationing policy has a simple form described by one critical rationing level per class and interval.

This mission concerns how those critical levels move over time. The paper's Theorem 2 gives a condition under which, without backlogging, the levels are monotone in the interval index, so that rationing is at least as strict early in the period as late in it. It is the second of four missions on the paper; the first establishes the critical-level policy itself (Theorem 1).

Setting

A period is divided into kkk intervals, indexed backwards: interval ttt has t−1t-1t−1 intervals after it, so interval kkk is the first and interval 1 the last. There are nnn demand classes, class nnn the most important. At the start of interval ttt the demand vector dt=(dt1,…,dtn)d_t = (d_t^1,\dots,d_t^n)dt​=(dt1​,…,dtn​) is observed; demands of different intervals are independent, and each class has a finite mean. With backlog bbb and stock zzz, one decides the vector uuu of outstanding demand left unsatisfied, 0≤u≤B=b+dt0 \le u \le B = b + d_t0≤u≤B=b+dt​, using 1⋅(B−u)\mathbf 1\cdot(B-u)1⋅(B−u) units of stock, so the stock at the end of the interval is w=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0w = z - \mathbf 1\cdot(B-u) \ge 0w=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0. A fraction at≥0a_t \ge 0at​≥0 of the unsatisfied demand is carried as backlog atua_t uat​u into the next interval: at=1a_t = 1at​=1 is complete backlogging, at=0a_t = 0at​=0 none.

The costs are a penalty pt⋅up_t\cdot upt​⋅u with 0≤pt1≤⋯≤ptn0 \le p_t^1 \le \dots \le p_t^n0≤pt1​≤⋯≤ptn​ (Assumption (C)), a holding cost ht(w)h_t(w)ht​(w) continuous and convex on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) (Assumption (A)), and a salvage cost v1(z)+v2(z−1⋅b)v_1(z) + v_2(z - \mathbf 1\cdot b)v1​(z)+v2​(z−1⋅b) at the end of the period, with v1v_1v1​, v2v_2v2​ convex and continuous and D+v2D^+v_2D+v2​ bounded below (Assumption (B)). Here D+D^+D+ denotes the right derivative. The optimal costs satisfy the recursion (1)

ft(z,B)=inf⁡0≤u≤B, w=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0[pt⋅u+ht(w)+gt−1(w,atu)],gt(z,b)=Eft(z,b+dt),f_t(z,B) = \inf_{0\le u\le B,\ w = z-\mathbf 1\cdot(B-u)\ge 0}\bigl[p_t\cdot u + h_t(w) + g_{t-1}(w, a_t u)\bigr],\qquad g_t(z,b) = \mathbb E f_t(z, b+d_t),ft​(z,B)=0≤u≤B, w=z−1⋅(B−u)≥0inf​[pt​⋅u+ht​(w)+gt−1​(w,at​u)],gt​(z,b)=Eft​(z,b+dt​),

with g0(z,b)=v1(z)+v2(z−1⋅b)g_0(z,b) = v_1(z) + v_2(z-\mathbf 1\cdot b)g0​(z,b)=v1​(z)+v2​(z−1⋅b).

With δj\delta_jδj​ the jjj-th unit vector, the critical rationing level zˉtj∈[0,∞]\bar z_t^j\in[0,\infty]zˉtj​∈[0,∞] is +∞+\infty+∞ if φtj(w)=ptjw+ht(w)+gt−1(w,atwδj)\varphi_t^j(w) = p_t^j w + h_t(w) + g_{t-1}(w, a_t w\delta_j)φtj​(w)=ptj​w+ht​(w)+gt−1​(w,at​wδj​) is strictly decreasing on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and the smallest minimizer of φtj\varphi_t^jφtj​ on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) otherwise. Under the paper's Theorem 1 the rationing level policy uj=(B(j)−z+zˉtj)+∧Bju^j = (B^{(j)} - z + \bar z_t^j)^+\wedge B^juj=(B(j)−z+zˉtj​)+∧Bj, with B(j)=∑i≥jBiB^{(j)} = \sum_{i\ge j}B^iB(j)=∑i≥j​Bi, is optimal: class jjj is served from stock only while the stock stays at or above zˉtj\bar z_t^jzˉtj​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 170)

Let 1≤t1\le t1≤t, t+1≤kt+1\le kt+1≤k, at+1=at=0a_{t+1} = a_t = 0at+1​=at​=0, and ai∈{0,1}a_i\in\{0,1\}ai​∈{0,1} for i≤ti\le ti≤t. If

pt+1j+lim⁡z→∞D+ht+1(z)≤ptj,thenzˉtj≤zˉt+1j.p_{t+1}^j + \lim_{z\to\infty}D^+h_{t+1}(z) \le p_t^j, \qquad\text{then}\qquad \bar z_t^j \le \bar z_{t+1}^j .pt+1j​+z→∞lim​D+ht+1​(z)≤ptj​,thenzˉtj​≤zˉt+1j​.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 5 (p. 168). For b≤bˉb\le\bar bb≤bˉ: Dz+gt(z,bˉ)≤Dz+gt(z,b)D_z^+g_t(z,\bar b)\le D_z^+g_t(z,b)Dz+​gt​(z,bˉ)≤Dz+​gt​(z,b).
  2. Lemma 6 (p. 168). For z≤zˉz\le\bar zz≤zˉ and y≥0y\ge 0y≥0: gt(zˉ,b)−gt(z,b)≤gt(zˉ+1⋅y,b+y)−gt(z+1⋅y,b+y)g_t(\bar z,b)-g_t(z,b)\le g_t(\bar z+\mathbf 1\cdot y,b+y)-g_t(z+\mathbf 1\cdot y,b+y)gt​(zˉ,b)−gt​(z,b)≤gt​(zˉ+1⋅y,b+y)−gt​(z+1⋅y,b+y).
  3. (12) (p. 170). If b=0b=0b=0 or at=1a_t=1at​=1, for small ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 and every d≥0d\ge0d≥0, the difference quotients of ft(⋅,b+d)f_t(\cdot,b+d)ft​(⋅,b+d), ft(⋅,b)f_t(\cdot,b)ft​(⋅,b) and ht+gt−1(⋅,b)h_t+g_{t-1}(\cdot,b)ht​+gt−1​(⋅,b) at zzz are ordered.
  4. Lemma 7 (p. 169). If at=1a_t = 1at​=1 or b=0b = 0b=0: Dz+gt(z,b)≤D+ht(z)+Dz+gt−1(z,b)D_z^+g_t(z,b)\le D^+h_t(z)+D_z^+g_{t-1}(z,b)Dz+​gt​(z,b)≤D+ht​(z)+Dz+​gt−1​(z,b).

Significance

The result says that, in intervals without backlogging, the stock reserved against a class is never larger late in the period than early in it, provided the class's penalty in the earlier interval plus the eventual marginal holding cost does not exceed its penalty in the later interval. Together with Theorem 1 it reduces the dynamic rationing problem to a family of one-dimensional critical numbers with a known order in both the class and the time index. The paper's example on p. 170 shows that the analogous monotonicity fails with backlogging, so the hypothesis at+1=at=0a_{t+1} = a_t = 0at+1​=at​=0 is essential.

The paper's proofs are complete but informal: they interchange expectation and right-derivative limits, and rest on Lemma 2 (convexity and attainment) and Theorem 1 (c). No part of this paper has been machine-checked. This mission produces formal statements of Theorem 2 and the three lemmas it rests on; contributions that formalize the known proofs, or that settle whether the extra hypothesis on earlier backlogging fractions (below) can be dropped, are equally in scope.

Difficulty

The central difficulty is Lemma 7, the comparison of the marginal value of stock in two consecutive intervals. The value functions are defined through an infimum and an expectation, so they are convex but not differentiable, and the minimizer in (1) changes regime each time the stock crosses a critical level; differentiating (1) directly is not available. Right derivatives may also be −∞-\infty−∞ at z=0z = 0z=0, and statements about them have to survive an interchange of expectation and a one-sided limit. The lemma depends on the optimal policy of Theorem 1, which is the subject of the first mission of this series. The claim of Lemma 7 is false when at=0a_t = 0at​=0 and b≠0b\ne0b=0 (p. 168), so no argument can ignore the case split.

Formalization scope

  • Classes are Fin n (paper class jjj is index j−1j-1j−1); intervals are natural numbers counted backwards; vectors are Fin n → ℝ with the pointwise order.
  • ftf_tft​ and gtg_tgt​ are defined by the recursion (1) with sInf and the Bochner integral, and every statement restricts to z≥0z\ge0z≥0, b≥0b\ge0b≥0, where the paper's Lemma 2 (proved in the first mission of the series) makes the infimum finite and attained and the integrand integrable.
  • D+D^+D+ is an extended-real liminf of right difference quotients, never a real derivWithin, which would return 000 where the right derivative is −∞-\infty−∞. Sums of right derivatives are taken in EReal.
  • The standing assumptions (A), (B), (C), at≥0a_t\ge0at​≥0, and probability laws on [0,∞)n[0,\infty)^n[0,∞)n with finite means are bundled in Model.Standing; (B)'s limit condition is read as "D+v2D^+v_2D+v2​ is bounded below".
  • Critical levels are values in WithTop ℝ satisfying the defining predicate (strictly decreasing ⇒ +∞+\infty+∞, otherwise the smallest minimizer); the theorem holds for any such choice. Their existence is a milestone of the first mission; a sanity check exhibits a model in which all hypotheses of Theorem 2 hold with zˉtj=zˉt+1j=0\bar z_t^j = \bar z_{t+1}^j = 0zˉtj​=zˉt+1j​=0.
  • The penalty hypothesis is stated for all z≥0z\ge0z≥0 instead of as a limit; these agree because D+ht+1D^+h_{t+1}D+ht+1​ is nondecreasing.
  • Disclosed addition: Theorem 2 is stated with ai∈{0,1}a_i\in\{0,1\}ai​∈{0,1} for all i≤ti\le ti≤t, the hypothesis of Lemma 7 that its proof uses; the printed statement names only at+1=at=0a_{t+1}=a_t=0at+1​=at​=0. The hypothesis on aia_iai​ in Lemmas 5–7 is required only for i≤ti\le ti≤t.
  • A formalization in which the goal assumes Lemma 7's inequality, or any property of D+gtD^+g_tD+gt​, would be trivial and is excluded: those facts appear only as milestones.

Selected references

  • D. M. Topkis, Optimal ordering and rationing policies in a nonstationary dynamic inventory model with n demand classes, Management Science 15(3) (1968), 160–176. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.15.3.160
  • A. F. Veinott, Jr., Optimal policy in a dynamic, single product, nonstationary inventory model with several demand classes, Operations Research 13(5) (1965), 761–778. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.13.5.761
7 thms1 active userReviewed
AnalysisOptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Scheduling with Convex Delay Costs: The Generalized cμ Rule: Policies Equalizing the Indices μ_k c_k(W_k/ρ_k) Attain the Heavy-Traffic Lower Bound on Cumulative Delay CostResearch Paper

Motivation

A single server shared by several classes of jobs must decide, at every moment, which class to work on. When each class kkk incurs a linear delay cost ckc_kck​ per unit of waiting time and needs mean service time 1/μk1/\mu_k1/μk​, the classical cμc\mucμ rule (serve the waiting class with the largest ckμkc_k\mu_kck​μk​) minimizes expected cost in many settings, from the M/G/1 queue to discrete-time models (Buyukkoc, Varaiya and Walrand, Adv. Appl. Probab. 1985). Linear costs are a strong restriction: in telecommunications, manufacturing and service systems the penalty for delay often grows faster than linearly, and with convex costs the static priority order of the cμc\mucμ rule is no longer optimal.

Van Mieghem (Ann. Appl. Probab. 1995) proposed the generalized cμc\mucμ rule: with nondecreasing convex delay costs CkC_kCk​ and marginal costs ck=Ck′c_k = C_k'ck​=Ck′​, serve the class with the largest index μkck(⋅)\mu_k c_k(\cdot)μk​ck​(⋅) evaluated at its current delay or workload. The paper proves that, in heavy traffic, this dynamic index policy is asymptotically optimal among all scheduling policies, including policies whose scaled workloads do not converge. This mission formalizes that result and the chain of propositions it rests on.

Setting

There are ddd job classes. In the nnnth system, the iiith class-kkk job arrives after an interarrival time uk,in>0u^n_{k,i}>0uk,in​>0 and needs service vk,in≥0v^n_{k,i}\ge 0vk,in​≥0. Akn(t)A^n_k(t)Akn​(t) counts class-kkk arrivals in [0,t][0,t][0,t] and Skn(x)S^n_k(x)Skn​(x) counts class-kkk completions within xxx units of server time. A policy is an allocation Tn=(Tkn)T^n=(T^n_k)Tn=(Tkn​), where Tkn(t)T^n_k(t)Tkn​(t) is the time in [0,t][0,t][0,t] spent on class kkk. From it come the headcount Nkn=Akn−Skn∘TknN^n_k = A^n_k - S^n_k\circ T^n_kNkn​=Akn​−Skn​∘Tkn​, the workload Wkn(t)=Vkn(Akn(t))−Tkn(t)W^n_k(t) = V^n_k(A^n_k(t)) - T^n_k(t)Wkn​(t)=Vkn​(Akn​(t))−Tkn​(t) (work present in class kkk), the class-FIFO delay τkn(t)=inf⁡{s≥0:Wkn(t)≤Tkn(t+s)−Tkn(t)}\tau^n_k(t)=\inf\{s\ge0: W^n_k(t)\le T^n_k(t+s)-T^n_k(t)\}τkn​(t)=inf{s≥0:Wkn​(t)≤Tkn​(t+s)−Tkn​(t)} of a job arriving at ttt, and the cumulative cost Jn(t)=∑k∑i≤Akn(t)Ckn(τk,in)J^n(t)=\sum_k\sum_{i\le A^n_k(t)} C^n_k(\tau^n_{k,i})Jn(t)=∑k​∑i≤Akn​(t)​Ckn​(τk,in​). Feasible policies are continuous, nondecreasing and work conserving.

The nnnth system runs on [0,n][0,n][0,n] and is studied at the diffusion scale: W~kn(t)=Wkn(nt)/n\tilde W^n_k(t)=W^n_k(nt)/\sqrt nW~kn​(t)=Wkn​(nt)/n​, N~kn\tilde N^n_kN~kn​, τ~kn\tilde\tau^n_kτ~kn​ likewise, and J~n(t)=Jn(nt)/n\tilde J^n(t)=J^n(nt)/nJ~n(t)=Jn(nt)/n. Arrival and service processes expand as An(nt)=nAˉn(t)+n A~n(t)+o(n)A^n(nt)=n\bar A^n(t)+\sqrt n\,\tilde A^n(t)+o(\sqrt n)An(nt)=nAˉn(t)+n​A~n(t)+o(n​) and Sn(nt)=nSˉn(t)+n S~n(t)+o(n)S^n(nt)=n\bar S^n(t)+\sqrt n\,\tilde S^n(t)+o(\sqrt n)Sn(nt)=nSˉn(t)+n​S~n(t)+o(n​). Assumption 1 asks that these terms converge, with rates λ=Aˉ∗′>0\lambda=\bar A^{*\prime}>0λ=Aˉ∗′>0, μ=Sˉ∗′>0\mu=\bar S^{*\prime}>0μ=Sˉ∗′>0, and that the system is in heavy traffic: n(R+n−e)→c~∗\sqrt n(R^n_+-e)\to\tilde c^*n​(R+n​−e)→c~∗, where Rkn=(Sˉkn)−1∘AˉknR^n_k=(\bar S^n_k)^{-1}\circ\bar A^n_kRkn​=(Sˉkn​)−1∘Aˉkn​ and ρk=λk/μk\rho_k=\lambda_k/\mu_kρk​=λk​/μk​ is the traffic intensity. Assumption 2 asks that the costs scale, Cn(n ⋅)→C∗(⋅)C^n(\sqrt n\,\cdot)\to C^*(\cdot)Cn(n​⋅)→C∗(⋅), and Assumption 3 that C∗C^*C∗ be strictly convex and C1\mathcal C^1C1.

The scaled total workload has a policy-independent limit W~+∗=φ(L~+∗+c~∗)\tilde W^*_+=\varphi(\tilde L^*_++\tilde c^*)W~+∗​=φ(L~+∗​+c~∗), with φ\varphiφ the one-dimensional reflection map. The key static problem splits a total yyy among classes:

g∘y(t)=arg⁡min⁡x∈R+d, ∑kxk=y(t) ∑kλk(t) Ck∗(xkρk(t)).(43)g\circ y(t)=\arg\min_{x\in\mathbb R^d_+,\ \sum_k x_k=y(t)}\ \sum_k\lambda_k(t)\,C^*_k\Big(\frac{x_k}{\rho_k(t)}\Big). \tag{43}g∘y(t)=argx∈R+d​, ∑k​xk​=y(t)min​ k∑​λk​(t)Ck∗​(ρk​(t)xk​​).(43)

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 7

Under Assumptions 1–3, for feasible policies with

max⁡k,l∥μkck∗(W~knρk)−μlcl∗(W~lnρl)∥→0,(51)\max_{k,l}\Big\|\mu_kc^*_k\Big(\frac{\tilde W^n_k}{\rho_k}\Big)-\mu_lc^*_l\Big(\frac{\tilde W^n_l}{\rho_l}\Big)\Big\|\to0, \tag{51}k,lmax​​μk​ck∗​(ρk​W~kn​​)−μl​cl∗​(ρl​W~ln​​)​→0,(51)

the costs and delays converge,

J~n→J~∗=∑k∫λkCk∗([g∘W~+∗]kρk)dt,τ~n→g∘W~+∗ρ.(52–53)\tilde J^n\to\tilde J^*=\sum_k\int\lambda_kC^*_k\Big(\frac{[g\circ\tilde W^*_+]_k}{\rho_k}\Big)dt,\qquad \tilde\tau^n\to\frac{g\circ\tilde W^*_+}{\rho}. \tag{52–53}J~n→J~∗=k∑​∫λk​Ck∗​(ρk​[g∘W~+∗​]k​​)dt,τ~n→ρg∘W~+∗​​.(52–53)

Milestones

Lemma 1 and Proposition 2 (jumps (33)–(34), first-order allocation (27), total workload (32), boundedness, equivalences (35)); Proposition 3 (μkW~kn−N~kn→0\mu_k\tilde W^n_k-\tilde N^n_k\to0μk​W~kn​−N~kn​→0); Proposition 4 (Little's law); Proposition 5 (converging policies); uniqueness and continuity of ggg (§4.1); the Kuhn–Tucker characterization (46)–(50); and Proposition 6, the lower bound

lim inf⁡nJ~n(t)≥J~∗(t)for every feasible policy sequence.(44)\liminf_n\tilde J^n(t)\ge\tilde J^*(t)\qquad\text{for every feasible policy sequence.}\tag{44}nliminf​J~n(t)≥J~∗(t)for every feasible policy sequence.(44)

Proposition 6 is what makes Proposition 7 an optimality statement; it is a separate milestone and not part of the goal.

Significance

The result. Proposition 7 identifies a simple, myopic index rule that is optimal at the diffusion scale for every time simultaneously, for arbitrary convex delay costs and nonstationary rates. It extends the cμc\mucμ rule beyond linear costs, links it to the "hug the optimal workload curve" policies of heavy-traffic control, and shows that the instantaneous allocation problem (43) is all that matters asymptotically. Later work on Brownian control of multiclass queues and on convex-cost scheduling (Mandelbaum and Stolyar 2004) builds on this.

Formalizing it. The paper's proofs are short and informal at several points, and the formalization makes these points explicit: the domain of every uniform limit, the policy class, and the reading of μ\muμ. No part of this paper has a machine-checked proof. A completed mission would give a verified heavy-traffic analysis of a multiclass single-server queue at the sample-path level, the first on the platform with a deterministic diffusion scaling and an explicit reflection map.

Difficulty

The obvious route is to show that W~n\tilde W^nW~n converges and then pass to the limit in the cost. That fails for the lower bound: Proposition 6 must cover policies whose class workloads never converge (polling-type policies), so it cannot use compactness of W~n\tilde W^nW~n and must instead compare the cost of an arbitrary split of W~+n\tilde W^n_+W~+n​ with the optimal split, locally in time. For the goal, (51) controls only the indices, so the convergence of W~n\tilde W^nW~n must be extracted from (51) through the inverse marginal costs, the convergence of the total workload, and the Kuhn–Tucker conditions of (43). Delay convergence then needs a uniform control of T~n\tilde T^nT~n over windows of length O(n−1/2)O(n^{-1/2})O(n−1/2), and cost convergence needs the convergence of the costs CnC^nCn applied to delays of order n\sqrt nn​.

Formalization scope

Lean namespace GenCMu.HeavyTraffic. The development is deterministic and works one sample path at a time; the stochastic version (Proposition 8) is not part of this mission. Conventions committed to:

  • Classes are Fin d; job indices start at 111; every "→" between functions is uniform convergence ((11)), on [0,1][0,1][0,1] unless stated; lim inf⁡\liminfliminf is written as "eventually ≥\ge≥ bound −ε-\varepsilon−ε".
  • The scaled processes are defined exactly, with Tˉn=Lˉn=Rn\bar T^n=\bar L^n=R^nTˉn=Lˉn=Rn ((69), (75)); the inverse in (14) is the generalized inverse on [0,1][0,1][0,1].
  • The o(n1/2)o(n^{1/2})o(n1/2) terms of (12)–(13) are uniform in ttt. The trends converge in C1\mathcal C^1C1, not only in C\mathcal CC. Without this, Aˉn,Sˉn\bar A^n,\bar S^nAˉn,Sˉn can oscillate on the n−1/2n^{-1/2}n−1/2 scale and (33)–(34) and Proposition 3 fail. The service expansion holds on server time [0,2n][0,2n][0,2n], so that for d=1d=1d=1 in heavy traffic the service times of jobs arriving before nnn are covered.
  • μk\mu_kμk​ in (20), (36), (41), (46)–(51) is μk(Rk∗(t))\mu_k(R^*_k(t))μk​(Rk∗​(t)), the service rate in real time, so ρk=λk/μk(Rk∗)\rho_k=\lambda_k/\mu_k(R^*_k)ρk​=λk​/μk​(Rk∗​).
  • (38) is uniform on compacts. Assumption 3's interior clause is imposed where W~+∗(t)>0\tilde W^*_+(t)>0W~+∗​(t)>0. At W~+∗(t)=0\tilde W^*_+(t)=0W~+∗​(t)=0 no point of Ω={0}\Omega=\{0\}Ω={0} is interior, and the literal clause would make the goal vacuous.
  • For the heavy-traffic limit and goal, feasible policies satisfy F1 (without adaptedness), F2–F4, Wk≥0W_k\ge0Wk​≥0, work conservation (used by W+n=φ(Xn)W^n_+=\varphi(X^n)W+n​=φ(Xn)), and every job finishes. Proposition 6 uses a broader cost-admissible class that permits idleness with work waiting. Class-FIFO is built into the delay (9).
  • The delays of jobs arriving near the horizon depend on post-horizon service. We require the allocation on every bounded diffusion-scale window after nnn to advance at the first-order rates ρk(1)\rho_k(1)ρk​(1). This explicit boundary hypothesis keeps Propositions 2, 4, 5, and 7 on the paper's full [0,1][0,1][0,1].
  • Lemma 1 additionally assumes a common Lipschitz bound on the first-order partial-sum trends. Uniform convergence alone permits jumps of order n\sqrt nn​; the bound repairs that omission. Uniqueness of the solution of (43) is stated under strict convexity: "convex increasing" (p. 820) does not give it. (35) is stated without the implication from τ~n\tilde\tau^nτ~n back to W~n\tilde W^nW~n, which fails in the uniform topology.
  • J~∗\tilde J^*J~∗ integrates the optimal value of (43), so Proposition 6 needs no choice of minimizer.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: no theorem assumes the convergence of W~n\tilde W^nW~n or W~+n\tilde W^n_+W~+n​, the uniqueness of minimizers, or the lower bound, and the joint satisfiability of all hypotheses has been checked in Lean for d=1d=1d=1.

Needed infrastructure: sample-path reflection-map estimates, counting/partial-sum inversion with uniform o(n)o(\sqrt n)o(n​) errors, parametric convex optimization (Berge's theorem for (43)), and Riemann-sum arguments for the lower bound. The reflection-map and inversion lemmas are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions to any milestone are welcome. The definitions are frozen, so a proof that needs a different definition should be raised in the discussion.

Selected references

  • J. A. Van Mieghem, Dynamic Scheduling with Convex Delay Costs: The Generalized cμ Rule, Ann. Appl. Probab. 5(3) (1995) 809–833. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177004706
  • C. Buyukkoc, P. Varaiya, J. Walrand, The cμ rule revisited, Adv. Appl. Probab. 17 (1985) 237–238.
  • J. M. Harrison, Brownian Motion and Stochastic Flow Systems, Wiley, 1985 (reflection map).
  • D. L. Iglehart, W. Whitt, Multiple channel queues in heavy traffic. I, Adv. Appl. Probab. 2 (1970) 150–177.
  • A. Mandelbaum, A. L. Stolyar, Scheduling flexible servers with convex delay costs: heavy-traffic optimality of the generalized cμ-rule, Oper. Res. 52(6) (2004) 836–855. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.1040.0156
16 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryAnalysisProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Values of Large Games II: Oceanic Games 2: Oceanic Values Are Limits of Values of Finite Weighted Majority GamesResearch Paper

Motivation

Weighted voting models assign a coalition a win when its combined vote reaches a quota. The Shapley value measures a player's contribution by averaging the change it makes when added to every possible predecessor coalition. This is straightforward to define for a finite list of voters, but a voting body may contain a few major holders and a very large population of individually small holders. A calculation made for a finite approximation should then have a stable meaning as the small holdings are divided more finely. Milnor and Shapley's oceanic game gives that question a precise form and asks whether its major-player values agree with the limits of finite weighted majority games. Milnor and Shapley, RAND RM-2649 (1961).

The question matters whenever a finite voting model is used to represent a diffuse electorate or ownership base. Without a continuity result, the measured power of a major voter could depend on how an otherwise identical mass of minor votes was artificially split. The memo's Theorem 1 establishes the required stability under an explicit small-weight condition. The result is a known theorem from the 1961 memorandum; the task here is its Lean formalization, including the mathematical objects that make its statement meaningful.

Setting

Fix a finite set M={1,…,m}M=\{1,\ldots,m\}M={1,…,m} of major players, with nonnegative weights wiw_iwi​. The ocean is a continuum of individually insignificant voters represented by the unit interval I=[0,1]I=[0,1]I=[0,1], with total weight α>0\alpha>0α>0. A coalition's vote is its major-player weight plus α\alphaα times the Lebesgue measure of its oceanic part. It wins when that vote reaches a quota c≥0c\ge0c≥0. The formal development uses Fin m for MMM and real weights; the underlying voting rule is the one in §2 of the memorandum. Milnor and Shapley, §2.

To assign a value to a major player, insert each major player independently and uniformly into the ordered ocean. A position vector x=(x1,…,xm)x=(x_1,\ldots,x_m)x=(x1​,…,xm​) lies in the cube ImI^mIm. Write P(t)={j∈M:xj<t}P(t)=\{j\in M:x_j<t\}P(t)={j∈M:xj​<t} and w(S)=∑j∈Swjw(S)=\sum_{j\in S}w_jw(S)=∑j∈S​wj​. Major player iii is pivotal when the predecessor weight is below the quota and adding iii reaches it, in the memo's weak-boundary form

w(P(xi))+αxi≤c≤w(P(xi))+wi+αxi.w(P(x_i))+\alpha x_i\le c\le w(P(x_i))+w_i+\alpha x_i.w(P(xi​))+αxi​≤c≤w(P(xi​))+wi​+αxi​.

The oceanic major-player value ϕi\phi_iϕi​ is the probability of this event. Since the insertion positions are uniform, it is also the mmm-dimensional Lebesgue volume of the corresponding set Ai⊆ImA_i\subseteq I^mAi​⊆Im. Equalities at boundary positions have zero volume. Milnor and Shapley, (2.3)–(2.4), pp. 4–5.

At stage ℓ\ellℓ, the finite approximation has the same mmm major players, followed by nℓn_\ellnℓ​ minor players with nonnegative weights aj,ℓa_{j,\ell}aj,ℓ​. Its quota and major weights are cℓc_\ellcℓ​ and wi,ℓw_{i,\ell}wi,ℓ​. A coalition has value one if its weight is at least cℓc_\ellcℓ​, and zero otherwise. The finite-game value ϕi,ℓ\phi_{i,\ell}ϕi,ℓ​ is the Shapley value of that coalition function. The published Shapley-value definition is reused for this general finite-game object; only the quota game and its oceanic limit are defined for this mission. Milnor and Shapley, Appendix (A.1), (A.4).

Formalization targets

Theorem 1: continuity of major-player values

The principal target says that if quotas and major weights converge, the total minor weight tends to α\alphaα, and every minor weight becomes small, then each major-player value converges:

cℓ→c,wi,ℓ→wi,∑jaj,ℓ→α>0,max⁡jaj,ℓ→0⟹ϕi,ℓ→ϕi.c_\ell\to c,\quad w_{i,\ell}\to w_i,\quad \sum_j a_{j,\ell}\to\alpha>0,\quad \max_j a_{j,\ell}\to0 \quad\Longrightarrow\quad \phi_{i,\ell}\to\phi_i.cℓ​→c,wi,ℓ​→wi​,j∑​aj,ℓ​→α>0,jmax​aj,ℓ​→0⟹ϕi,ℓ​→ϕi​.

This is Theorem 1, equations (3.1)–(3.2), of the memorandum. Its conclusion refers to the pivotal-probability definition of ϕi\phi_iϕi​ above. Milnor and Shapley, Theorem 1, p. 6.

Supporting statements

The milestone list follows three statements present in the source: equation (3.4) partitions AiA_iAi​ by the predecessor set SSS; equations (3.5)–(3.6) give the volume of each part as a one-variable integral with clamped endpoints; and Appendix (A.1)–(A.3) states the finite-game limit as a sum of those integrals. Their shared expression is

Li(c,w,α)=∑S⊆M∖{i}∫[0,1]∩[(c−w(S)−wi)/α,(c−w(S))/α]t∣S∣(1−t)m−∣S∣−1 dt.L_i(c,w,\alpha)=\sum_{S\subseteq M\setminus\{i\}}\int_{[0,1]\cap[(c-w(S)-w_i)/\alpha,(c-w(S))/\alpha]} t^{|S|}(1-t)^{m-|S|-1}\,dt.Li​(c,w,α)=S⊆M∖{i}∑​∫[0,1]∩[(c−w(S)−wi​)/α,(c−w(S))/α]​t∣S∣(1−t)m−∣S∣−1dt.

The appendix's limit statement concerns LiL_iLi​; Theorem 1 concerns ϕi\phi_iϕi​. Both are separate targets in the formalization. Milnor and Shapley, §3 and Appendix.

Significance

The theorem makes the major-player value independent of a particular fine division of the minor vote, provided the total minor weight and the other parameters converge as stated. The same oceanic game can therefore stand for many finite approximating sequences. The integral expression also gives a precise comparison point between finite Shapley values and the geometric definition by pivotal volume. Milnor and Shapley, §1 and Theorem 1.

The mathematical result is proved in the cited memorandum, and its appendix recapitulates a limit theorem from the preceding work in the series. The formalization work is to state and prove these known claims over Lean's finite index types, Lebesgue measure, integrals, and limits. Reusable components include the quota-game characteristic function and the interface between a finite Shapley value and a changing number of minor players. The mission does not claim that the historical theorem is open, nor that these target statements already have machine-checked proofs.

Difficulty

The number of minor players changes with ℓ\ellℓ, so the finite Shapley sum does not have a fixed set of coalitions. Merely taking a limit term by term in that sum does not justify its limit: the number and weights of the terms also change. The condition that the largest minor weight tends to zero controls a triangular family of games, while the oceanic definition is a measure of a geometric pivotal event. Matching the two descriptions requires care at the quota boundaries and at intervals that may be empty. These are the central issues represented by the appendix milestone and by equations (3.4)–(3.6). Milnor and Shapley, §3 and Appendix.

Formalization scope

The Lean model uses Fin m for major players and Fin (n l) for minor players at stage lll, concatenated with majors first. It uses a real-valued quota characteristic function, the published finite Shapley-value definition, and product Lebesgue volume on the cube [0,1]m[0,1]^m[0,1]m for uniform insertion positions. The predecessor relation is strict, xj<xix_j<x_ixj​<xi​, exactly as in §2; the complementary cell relation is weak. The pivotal inequalities follow (2.4), and the oceanic value is defined from their volume. Defining it as LiL_iLi​ would make the comparison demanded by Theorem 1 empty, so that equality remains a theorem-level obligation.

The source defines oceanic games with c≥0c\ge0c≥0, wi≥0w_i\ge0wi​≥0, and α>0\alpha>0α>0. The finite approximants are read as weighted majority games with nonnegative weights; that condition is explicit in Lean. No sign condition is imposed on the stage quotas cℓc_\ellcℓ​, since (3.2) states none (only the limit satisfies c≥0c\ge0c≥0). The statement does not impose the footnote's upper bound c≤w(M)+αc\le w(M)+\alphac≤w(M)+α because Theorem 1 only concerns major-player values, which are zero in a null game. An empty minor list is permitted at an early stage. Rather than taking the maximum of an empty list, Lean says that for each ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, all minor weights are eventually at most ε\varepsilonε; with nonnegative weights this is the paper's vanishing-maximum condition. A positive limiting ocean weight also excludes an eventually empty minor population.

The integral in (A.3) is a set integral over the stated intersection of closed intervals, so an empty intersection contributes zero. For (3.5), the endpoints are clamped to [0,1][0,1][0,1]. The condition S⊆M∖{i}S\subseteq M\setminus\{i\}S⊆M∖{i} ensures m−∣S∣−1m-|S|-1m−∣S∣−1 is nonnegative before it is represented as a natural-number exponent. Contributions that strengthen the measure-theoretic partition, the cell-volume computation, or the varying-population finite limit are within scope; a proof may use other intermediate lemmas while keeping the sourced target statements unchanged.

Selected references

  • John W. Milnor and Lloyd S. Shapley, Values of Large Games, II: Oceanic Games, RAND Research Memorandum RM-2649, 1961. RAND publication page.
  • Lloyd S. Shapley and Norman Shapiro, Values of Large Games, I: A Limit Theorem, RAND Research Memorandum RM-2648, 1960. RAND publication page.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 2: With a Bounded Second-Stage Set the Intrinsic First-Stage Problem Coincides with the One Induced by P and Recourse Is AttainedResearch Paper

Motivation

Two-stage stochastic programming with recourse models a decision taken in two steps: a first-stage decision x1x_1x1​ is fixed before a random outcome sss is observed, and a recourse decision x2(s)x_2(s)x2​(s) is taken afterwards, once sss is known. The model goes back to Dantzig (1955) and Beale (1955) and is the basic template of stochastic optimization in operations research: capacity planning before demand is known, production before prices are revealed, reservoir management before inflows are observed.

When the outcome space is not finite, the recourse is a function x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅), and the problem must specify the class of functions it ranges over. Rockafellar and Wets (Pacific J. Math. 62 (1976) 173–195) develop the duality theory of the convex case with recourse functions that are measurable and essentially bounded (L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞), the setting in which the dual multipliers and their interpretation as prices become available. Their §3 asks whether that restriction loses anything: whether minimizing over L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ recourses gives the same first-stage problem as minimizing, scenario by scenario, the best attainable second-stage cost.

Setting

Let (S,Σ,σ)(S,\Sigma,\sigma)(S,Σ,σ) be a probability space. The data are closed convex nonempty sets C1⊆Rn1C_1\subseteq\mathbb R^{n_1}C1​⊆Rn1​, C2⊆Rn2C_2\subseteq\mathbb R^{n_2}C2​⊆Rn2​, finite convex functions f10,f1if_{10},f_{1i}f10​,f1i​ on Rn1\mathbb R^{n_1}Rn1​ (i=1,…,m1i=1,\dots,m_1i=1,…,m1​), and functions f20(s,x1,x2)f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2)f20​(s,x1​,x2​), f2i(s,x1,x2)f_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)f2i​(s,x1​,x2​) (i=1,…,m2i=1,\dots,m_2i=1,…,m2​), finite and jointly convex in (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​) for each sss, and measurable in sss for each (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​), summable for i=0i=0i=0 and bounded for i≥1i\ge1i≥1. These are the paper's standing assumptions.

With X=Rn1×Ln2∞X=\mathbb R^{n_1}\times\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}X=Rn1​×Ln2​∞​, the essential objective of the problem P\mathbf PP is

f(x1,x2)=F1(x1,0)+∫SF2(s,x1,x2(s),0) σ(ds),f(x_1,x_2)=F_1(x_1,0)+\int_S F_2\big(s,x_1,x_2(s),0\big)\,\sigma(ds),f(x1​,x2​)=F1​(x1​,0)+∫S​F2​(s,x1​,x2​(s),0)σ(ds),

where F1(x1,u1)=f10(x1)F_1(x_1,u_1)=f_{10}(x_1)F1​(x1​,u1​)=f10​(x1​) if x1∈C1x_1\in C_1x1​∈C1​ and f1i(x1)≤u1if_{1i}(x_1)\le u_{1i}f1i​(x1​)≤u1i​ for all iii, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise, and F2(s,x1,x2,u2)=f20(s,x1,x2)F_2(s,x_1,x_2,u_2)=f_{20}(s,x_1,x_2)F2​(s,x1​,x2​,u2​)=f20​(s,x1​,x2​) if x2∈C2x_2\in C_2x2​∈C2​ and f2i(s,x1,x2)≤u2if_{2i}(s,x_1,x_2)\le u_{2i}f2i​(s,x1​,x2​)≤u2i​ for all iii, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise. Integrals of extended-real functions follow the paper's convention (2.4): the ordinary integral (real or −∞-\infty−∞) when the integrand is majorized by a summable function, and +∞+\infty+∞ otherwise.

Two first-stage problems are compared:

  • the first-stage problem induced by P\mathbf PP minimizes J(x1)=inf⁡x2∈Ln2∞f(x1,x2)J(x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}}f(x_1,x_2)J(x1​)=infx2​∈Ln2​∞​​f(x1​,x2​);
  • the intrinsic first-stage problem Q\mathbf QQ minimizes j(x1)=F1(x1,0)+∫Sq(s,x1) σ(ds)j(x_1)=F_1(x_1,0)+\int_S q(s,x_1)\,\sigma(ds)j(x1​)=F1​(x1​,0)+∫S​q(s,x1​)σ(ds), where q(s,x1)=inf⁡x2∈Rn2F2(s,x1,x2,0)q(s,x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathbb R^{n_2}}F_2(s,x_1,x_2,0)q(s,x1​)=infx2​∈Rn2​​F2​(s,x1​,x2​,0) is the optimal recourse cost in scenario sss.

The hypothesis of the general result uses ρ(s,x1)=inf⁡{∣x2∣∣F2(s,x1,x2,0)<+∞}\rho(s,x_1)=\inf\{|x_2|\mid F_2(s,x_1,x_2,0)<+\infty\}ρ(s,x1​)=inf{∣x2​∣∣F2​(s,x1​,x2​,0)<+∞}, the Euclidean distance from the origin to the feasible recourses (+∞+\infty+∞ if there are none), and calls x1x_1x1​ intrinsically feasible when j(x1)<+∞j(x_1)<+\inftyj(x1​)<+∞. A normal convex integrand hhh on S×RnS\times\mathbb R^nS×Rn is lower semicontinuous, convex and proper in zzz for each sss, with a measurability condition given by a sequence of measurable functions dense in each dom⁡h(s,⋅)\operatorname{dom}h(s,\cdot)domh(s,⋅).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 187)

If C2C_2C2​ is bounded, then for every x1∈Rn1x_1\in\mathbb R^{n_1}x1​∈Rn1​

j(x1)=J(x1)=inf⁡x2∈Ln2∞f(x1,x2),inf⁡Q=inf⁡P,j(x_1)=J(x_1)=\inf_{x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}}f(x_1,x_2),\qquad \inf\mathbf Q=\inf\mathbf P,j(x1​)=J(x1​)=x2​∈Ln2​∞​inf​f(x1​,x2​),infQ=infP,

the two first-stage problems have the same minimizers, and the infimum over x2∈Ln2∞x_2\in\mathcal L^\infty_{n_2}x2​∈Ln2​∞​ is attained for each x1x_1x1​.

Theorem 1 (p. 186)

If ρ(⋅,x1)\rho(\cdot,x_1)ρ(⋅,x1​) is essentially bounded for every intrinsically feasible x1x_1x1​, then j(x1)=J(x1)j(x_1)=J(x_1)j(x1​)=J(x1​) for all x1x_1x1​, inf⁡Q=inf⁡P\inf\mathbf Q=\inf\mathbf PinfQ=infP, and the minimizers coincide. Boundedness of C2C_2C2​ is a special case of this hypothesis.

Milestones

  • (2.1): F(x,u)=F1(x1,u1)+∫SF2(s,x1,x2(s),u2(s)) σ(ds)F(x,u)=F_1(x_1,u_1)+\int_S F_2(s,x_1,x_2(s),u_2(s))\,\sigma(ds)F(x,u)=F1​(x1​,u1​)+∫S​F2​(s,x1​,x2​(s),u2​(s))σ(ds) (p. 180);
  • Proposition 1: for a normal convex integrand, inf⁡z∈Lnp∫Sh(s,z(s)) σ(ds)=∫Sinf⁡zh(s,z) σ(ds)\inf_{z\in\mathcal L^p_n}\int_S h(s,z(s))\,\sigma(ds)=\int_S\inf_z h(s,z)\,\sigma(ds)infz∈Lnp​​∫S​h(s,z(s))σ(ds)=∫S​infz​h(s,z)σ(ds) whenever the left side is not +∞+\infty+∞ (p. 181);
  • Proposition 2: F2F_2F2​ is a normal convex integrand (p. 182);
  • Proposition 4: q(⋅,x1)q(\cdot,x_1)q(⋅,x1​) is measurable (p. 185);
  • (3.5)–(3.6): j≤fj\le fj≤f, hence inf⁡Q≤inf⁡P\inf\mathbf Q\le\inf\mathbf PinfQ≤infP (p. 186);
  • the feasible-recourse multifunction (3.10) is measurable, ρ\rhoρ is measurable, and the nearest feasible point is a measurable selection (p. 187);
  • Theorem 1 (p. 186);
  • with C2C_2C2​ bounded, the argmin multifunction of F2(s,x1,⋅,0)F_2(s,x_1,\cdot,0)F2​(s,x1​,⋅,0) is nonempty, compact, measurable and has a measurable selection (p. 188).

The Corollary of Theorem 2 (p. 188), that x1x_1x1​ minimizes Q\mathbf QQ iff some (x1,x2)(x_1,x_2)(x1​,x2​) minimizes P\mathbf PP, is included as a further statement.

Significance

The theorem justifies the modelling choice behind the paper's duality theory: when the second-stage constraint set is bounded, restricting recourse to essentially bounded measurable functions changes neither the optimal value nor the optimal first-stage decisions, and an optimal recourse function exists for every first stage. The duality theory of the companion mission (Theorem 3 of the same paper) is developed in that L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ setting, so the two results together describe the problem completely in the bounded case. Proposition 1, the interchange of infimum and integral for normal integrands, is a basic tool of stochastic programming and of the calculus of variations, used well beyond this paper.

The results are proved in the 1976 paper, relying on Rockafellar's earlier work on normal integrands and measurable selections. None of them has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has the Lebesgue and Bochner integrals, Lp\mathcal L^pLp spaces and the measurable-selection prerequisites in partial form; it has no normal integrands, no extended-real integral convention of this kind, and no interchange theorem. A formal development produces those as reusable components.

Difficulty

The inequality j≤Jj\le Jj≤J is immediate. The reverse inequality requires, from the pointwise infima q(s,x1)q(s,x_1)q(s,x1​), a single recourse function x2(⋅)x_2(\cdot)x2​(⋅) that is measurable, essentially bounded and nearly optimal in almost every scenario. Choosing a near-minimizer separately for each sss gives no measurability at all: the content is a measurable choice, and that needs the normality of F2F_2F2​ and the measurability of the multifunctions of feasible and of optimal recourses. Essential boundedness is a second, independent obstacle: without a bound on ρ\rhoρ every feasible recourse may be unbounded, and the infimum over L∞\mathcal L^\inftyL∞ can then exceed jjj. Attainment in Theorem 2 needs, in addition, compactness of the argmin sets, which comes from the boundedness of C2C_2C2​ and lower semicontinuity.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is Fin n → ℝ; indices i=1,…,mi=1,\dots,mi=1,…,m are Fin m; Ln∞\mathcal L^\infty_nLn∞​ and Lnp\mathcal L^p_nLnp​ are Mathlib's Lp (Fin n → ℝ) p σ, so recourse functions are almost-everywhere classes and the second-stage constraints hold almost surely. σ\sigmaσ is a probability measure in every theorem. All extended-real quantities (FFF, F1F_1F1​, F2F_2F2​, fff, JJJ, qqq, jjj, ρ\rhoρ, inf⁡P\inf\mathbf PinfP, inf⁡Q\inf\mathbf QinfQ) take values in EReal, and every infimum is the complete-lattice infimum, so an empty infimum is +∞+\infty+∞. The integral convention (2.4) is the published definition DupacovaWets.Consistency.expect: +∞+\infty+∞ when the positive part has infinite integral (for a measurable function, exactly when it has no summable majorant), and otherwise the difference of the lower Lebesgue integrals of the positive and negative parts. ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ in ρ\rhoρ is the Euclidean length, not the sup norm. "Gives the minimum" is "has value ≤\le≤ the value at every point". Measurability of a multifunction is the published definition DupacovaWets.Consistency.IsMeasurableMultifunction ({s∣Γ(s)∩K≠∅}\{s\mid\Gamma(s)\cap K\ne\emptyset\}{s∣Γ(s)∩K=∅} measurable for every closed KKK). The standing assumptions are fields of the structure Problem.

The integral of an extended-real function must not be replaced by a Bochner integral of its real part, which would turn ±∞\pm\infty±∞ values into 000 and make jjj meaningless; and the infima must not be real sInf, which returns 000 on unbounded sets.

Reusable beyond this mission: the notion of a normal convex integrand on a finite-dimensional space, and Proposition 1. Contributions of measurable-selection infrastructure (Kuratowski–Ryll-Nardzewski type theorems, measurability of distance functions of closed-valued multifunctions) are welcome as supporting lemmas. The mission "Stochastic Convex Programming: Basic Duality 1" formalizes the duality theorem of the same paper on the same model.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Stochastic convex programming: basic duality, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 62(1) (1976) 173–195. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1976.62.173
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Measurable dependence of convex sets and functions on parameters, Journal of Mathematical Analysis and Applications 28 (1969) 4–25. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(69)90104-8
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Integrals which are convex functionals, Pacific Journal of Mathematics 24(3) (1968) 525–539. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1968.24.525
  • G. B. Dantzig, Linear programming under uncertainty, Management Science 1(3–4) (1955) 197–206. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.1.3-4.197
15 thms1 active userReviewed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Scenarios and Policy Aggregation in Optimization Under Uncertainty 2: A Limit of Locally Optimal Progressive Hedging Steps Is a Stationary Point of the Nonconvex ProblemResearch Paper

Motivation

Multistage decision problems under uncertainty are often modelled by a finite set of scenarios: each scenario sss fixes one possible future, and for it a deterministic problem can be solved. What makes the problem stochastic is the requirement that decisions may depend only on information available at the time they are taken. Rockafellar and Wets (WP-87-119, 1987; journal version Math. Oper. Res. 16 (1991) 119–147) proposed the progressive hedging algorithm, which solves the scenario problems separately with a penalty and a price term and blends their solutions step by step into a single policy that respects the information constraints. The method is a standard decomposition scheme of stochastic programming and is implemented in solver libraries such as PySP and mpi-sppy.

For convex problems the paper proves convergence through the theory of the proximal point algorithm. Many practical scenario models are not convex (integer-like penalties, nonconvex costs). For that case the paper proves one result, Theorem 6.1: the algorithm cannot be expected to find a global minimum, but whenever it converges, its limit is a stationary point. This mission formalizes that result.

Setting

Let SSS be a finite set of scenarios with probabilities ps>0p_s>0ps​>0, ∑sps=1\sum_s p_s=1∑s​ps​=1. A decision is a vector x=(x1,…,xT)∈Rnx=(x_1,\dots,x_T)\in\mathbb R^nx=(x1​,…,xT​)∈Rn, split into blocks xtx_txt​ taken at times t=1,…,Tt=1,\dots,Tt=1,…,T. For each scenario there is a scenario subproblem

(Ps)minimize fs(x) over x∈Cs⊆Rn.(P_s)\qquad\text{minimize } f_s(x)\ \text{over } x\in C_s\subseteq\mathbb R^n .(Ps​)minimize fs​(x) over x∈Cs​⊆Rn.

Throughout, every CsC_sCs​ is nonempty and closed, every fsf_sfs​ is locally Lipschitz, and the sets {x∈Cs∣fs(x)≤α}\{x\in C_s\mid f_s(x)\le\alpha\}{x∈Cs​∣fs​(x)≤α} are bounded.

A policy is a map X:S→RnX:S\to\mathbb R^nX:S→Rn. Policies form a space E\mathcal EE with inner product ⟨X,Y⟩=∑spsX(s)⋅Y(s)\langle X,Y\rangle=\sum_s p_s X(s)\cdot Y(s)⟨X,Y⟩=∑s​ps​X(s)⋅Y(s) and norm ∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2\|X\|=\langle X,X\rangle^{1/2}∥X∥=⟨X,X⟩1/2. For each time ttt the scenarios are partitioned into bundles A∈AtA\in\mathcal A_tA∈At​ of scenarios indistinguishable at time ttt. A policy is implementable, X∈NX\in\mathcal NX∈N, when each XtX_tXt​ is constant on every bundle of At\mathcal A_tAt​; it is admissible, X∈CX\in\mathcal CX∈C, when X(s)∈CsX(s)\in C_sX(s)∈Cs​ for all sss. The aggregation operator JJJ replaces Xt(s)X_t(s)Xt​(s) by its conditional expectation over the bundle of sss; K=I−JK=I-JK=I−J, and M={W∣JW=0}=N⊥\mathcal M=\{W\mid JW=0\}=\mathcal N^\perpM={W∣JW=0}=N⊥. With F(X)=∑spsfs(X(s))F(X)=\sum_s p_s f_s(X(s))F(X)=∑s​ps​fs​(X(s)) the problem is

(P)minimize F(X) over X∈C∩N.(P)\qquad\text{minimize } F(X)\ \text{over } X\in\mathcal C\cap\mathcal N .(P)minimize F(X) over X∈C∩N.

Progressive hedging with parameter r>0r>0r>0 keeps Xν∈CX^\nu\in\mathcal CXν∈C and Wν∈MW^\nu\in\mathcal MWν∈M. It sets X^ν=JXν\hat X^\nu=JX^\nuX^ν=JXν, computes Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) for every sss from

(Psν)minimize fs(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+12r∣x−X^ν(s)∣2 over x∈Cs,(P^\nu_s)\qquad\text{minimize } f_s(x)+x\cdot W^\nu(s)+\tfrac12 r|x-\hat X^\nu(s)|^2\ \text{over } x\in C_s ,(Psν​)minimize fs​(x)+x⋅Wν(s)+21​r∣x−X^ν(s)∣2 over x∈Cs​,

and updates Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1W^{\nu+1}=W^\nu+rKX^{\nu+1}Wν+1=Wν+rKXν+1. In the nonconvex case, Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) is only required to be δ\deltaδ-locally optimal: optimal among the points of CsC_sCs​ within Euclidean distance δ\deltaδ of it, for a fixed δ>0\delta>0δ>0.

∂g(x)\partial g(x)∂g(x) denotes Clarke's generalized gradient of a locally Lipschitz ggg and NC(x)N_C(x)NC​(x) Clarke's normal cone to a closed set CCC.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.1

If Xν→X∗X^\nu\to X^*Xν→X∗ and Wν→W∗W^\nu\to W^*Wν→W∗, then X∗∈N∩CX^*\in\mathcal N\cap\mathcal CX∗∈N∩C, W∗∈MW^*\in\mathcal MW∗∈M and

−W∗(s)∈∂fs(X∗(s))+NCs(X∗(s))for all s∈S;-W^*(s)\in\partial f_s(X^*(s))+N_{C_s}(X^*(s))\qquad\text{for all } s\in S;−W∗(s)∈∂fs​(X∗(s))+NCs​​(X∗(s))for all s∈S;

moreover X∗X^*X∗ is a local minimizer of (P~)(\tilde P)(P~), which is (P) with fsf_sfs​ replaced by f~s(x)=fs(x)+12r∣x−X∗(s)∣2\tilde f_s(x)=f_s(x)+\tfrac12 r|x-X^*(s)|^2f~​s​(x)=fs​(x)+21​r∣x−X∗(s)∣2, and −W∗(s)∈∂f~s(X∗(s))+NCs(X∗(s))-W^*(s)\in\partial\tilde f_s(X^*(s))+N_{C_s}(X^*(s))−W∗(s)∈∂f~​s​(X∗(s))+NCs​​(X∗(s)).

Milestones

  1. (6.4)–(6.5): each Xν+1X^{\nu+1}Xν+1 is optimal for (Pν)(P^\nu)(Pν), minimize F(X)+⟨X,Wν⟩+12r∥X−X^ν∥2F(X)+\langle X,W^\nu\rangle+\tfrac12 r\|X-\hat X^\nu\|^2F(X)+⟨X,Wν⟩+21​r∥X−X^ν∥2 over C\mathcal CC, on the ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥-ball of radius δ′=δmin⁡sps1/2\delta'=\delta\min_s p_s^{1/2}δ′=δmins​ps1/2​.
  2. W∗∈MW^*\in\mathcal MW∗∈M, KXν→0KX^\nu\to0KXν→0 and X∗∈NX^*\in\mathcal NX∗∈N.
  3. (6.6): X∗X^*X∗ is locally optimal for (P∗)(P^*)(P∗), minimize F(X)+⟨X,W∗⟩+12r∥X−X∗∥2F(X)+\langle X,W^*\rangle+\tfrac12 r\|X-X^*\|^2F(X)+⟨X,W∗⟩+21​r∥X−X∗∥2 over C\mathcal CC.
  4. X∗X^*X∗ is locally optimal for F(X)+12r∥X−X∗∥2=E{f~s(X(s))}F(X)+\tfrac12 r\|X-X^*\|^2=E\{\tilde f_s(X(s))\}F(X)+21​r∥X−X∗∥2=E{f~​s​(X(s))} over C∩N\mathcal C\cap\mathcal NC∩N.
  5. (6.2): ∂f~s(X∗(s))=∂fs(X∗(s))\partial\tilde f_s(X^*(s))=\partial f_s(X^*(s))∂f~​s​(X∗(s))=∂fs​(X∗(s)), from ∂f~s(x)=∂fs(x)+r(x−X∗(s))\partial\tilde f_s(x)=\partial f_s(x)+r(x-X^*(s))∂f~​s​(x)=∂fs​(x)+r(x−X∗(s)).
  6. Theorem 4.1: at a local minimizer of (P) satisfying the constraint qualification "the only W∈MW\in\mathcal MW∈M with −W(s)∈NCs(X∗(s))-W(s)\in N_{C_s}(X^*(s))−W(s)∈NCs​​(X∗(s)) for all sss is W=0W=0W=0", some W∗∈MW^*\in\mathcal MW∗∈M satisfies the conditions above; in the convex case these conditions imply global optimality.

Significance

Theorem 6.1 is the paper's only guarantee outside convexity. It says that progressive hedging, run with local solvers on nonconvex scenario subproblems, cannot converge to a point that fails the first-order conditions, and that the limiting price system W∗W^*W∗ is a Lagrange multiplier for the nonanticipativity constraint X∈NX\in\mathcal NX∈N. It needs no constraint qualification, unlike the general necessary condition of Theorem 4.1: the multiplier is produced by the algorithm. This is the basis for using progressive hedging as a heuristic for nonconvex and mixed-integer stochastic programs.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has not been machine-checked. A complete formalization would give checked statements of the scenario model (JJJ, KKK, N\mathcal NN, M\mathcal MM with the weighted inner product), of the algorithm with inexact local subproblem solutions, and of Clarke's optimality conditions for problems with separable structure. The convex convergence theory of the same paper is the subject of the companion mission Scenarios and Policy Aggregation in Optimization Under Uncertainty 1.

Difficulty

The local optimality of Xν+1(s)X^{\nu+1}(s)Xν+1(s) is relative to a ball centred at the iterate, which moves. Passing to the limit requires a radius that is uniform in ν\nuν and in the norm of E\mathcal EE; this is what δ′\delta'δ′ provides, and it only covers points strictly inside the limiting ball: a point of C\mathcal CC at distance exactly δ′\delta'δ′ from X∗X^*X∗ may lie outside every ball around the iterates. The step from local optimality to the multiplier condition uses Clarke's necessary condition for minimization over a closed set and the sum rule for a Lipschitz function plus a smooth one; neither is in Mathlib. Theorem 4.1 needs, in addition, a calculus rule for normal cones of an intersection under a qualification condition, and the transfer of Clarke's objects between E\mathcal EE with the weighted inner product and the individual scenario spaces.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). A policy is a function S → EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). The weighted inner product and norm of E\mathcal EE are explicit definitions (ip, pnorm); Lean's built-in norm on policies (the sup norm) is used only for topological notions: convergence of the iterates and "locally optimal" without a radius, which do not depend on the norm. The radii δ′\delta'δ′ are in the weighted norm, the radius δ\deltaδ in the Euclidean norm of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. Time blocks are a monotone map from coordinates to periods; bundles are the classes of a setoid on SSS for each period. The standing assumptions are fields of the model structure, so every theorem carries them. Indices are 0-based and sequences are indexed by ν=0,1,2,…\nu=0,1,2,\dotsν=0,1,2,…; the run starts from X0∈CX^0\in\mathcal CX0∈C and W0∈MW^0\in\mathcal MW0∈M. Theorem 4.1 is stated in its decomposed form (4.4), scenario by scenario.

Clarke's generalized gradient and normal cone are the published platform definitions ClarkeGradients.Shared.generalizedGradient (convex hull of limits of gradients) and ClarkeGradients.FlowInvariance.normalCone (closure of the cone generated by the generalized gradient of the distance function); for locally Lipschitz functions and closed nonempty sets these are the objects the paper uses.

Formalizations that trivialize the statement are excluded: Theorem 6.1 carries no convexity hypothesis and no constraint qualification, the δ′\delta'δ′-balls are not measured in the sup norm, and the run predicate is satisfiable (the model files come with a sanity check exhibiting a run).

Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: Clarke's necessary condition for local minimization of a Lipschitz function over a closed set, the sum rule with a C1C^1C1 function, products of normal cones, and basic facts about JJJ (an orthogonal projection onto N\mathcal NN for the weighted inner product). Contributions of any of these are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty, IIASA Working Paper WP-87-119, 1987. https://pure.iiasa.ac.at/id/eprint/2933/
  • R. T. Rockafellar and R. J.-B. Wets, Scenarios and policy aggregation in optimization under uncertainty, Mathematics of Operations Research 16(1), 119–147, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.16.1.119
  • F. H. Clarke, Generalized gradients and applications, Transactions of the AMS 205, 247–262, 1975. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1975-0367131-6
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
11 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Inequalities on Partially Ordered Spaces 3: Ornstein's d̄-Distance of Stationary Real Processes Equals ∫ω⁰dP + ∫ω⁰dQ − 2 sup{∫ω⁰dR : R ≺ P, R ≺ Q}Research Paper

Motivation

Two stationary random sequences can have identical distributions at each individual time while differing in their dependence across time. Comparing only their one-time marginals therefore misses a feature relevant to stochastic-process comparison. Ornstein's dˉ\bar ddˉ measures the cost of matching two whole stationary processes: it minimizes the expected discrepancy at one time over joint laws that are themselves stationary. Kamae, Krengel, and O'Brien use stochastic order to replace that optimization over pairs of processes with an optimization over a single common lower process in Theorem 8 of their 1977 paper. This mission formalizes that identity and the stationary coupling results supporting it.

Setting

A two-sided path with values in a space EEE is a sequence ω=(ωn)n∈Z\omega=(\omega^n)_{n\in\mathbb Z}ω=(ωn)n∈Z​. The shift TTT sends ω\omegaω to the path whose coordinate nnn is ωn+1\omega^{n+1}ωn+1. A probability law PPP on paths is stationary, written P∈STP\in\mathcal S_TP∈ST​, when P∘T−1=PP\circ T^{-1}=PP∘T−1=P. A law ν\nuν on pairs of paths is jointly stationary, written ν∈SS\nu\in\mathcal S_Sν∈SS​, when it is invariant under S(ω1,ω2)=(Tω1,Tω2)S(\omega_1,\omega_2)=(T\omega_1,T\omega_2)S(ω1​,ω2​)=(Tω1​,Tω2​). Its first and second marginals are denoted ν1\nu_1ν1​ and ν2\nu_2ν2​. These are the objects defined at the start of Section 8.

When EEE has a partial order, paths are ordered coordinatewise: ω1≤ω2\omega_1\leq\omega_2ω1​≤ω2​ means ω1n≤ω2n\omega_1^n\leq\omega_2^nω1n​≤ω2n​ for every integer nnn. For probability laws on any such space, write P≺QP\prec QP≺Q if ∫f dP≤∫f dQ\int f\,dP\leq\int f\,dQ∫fdP≤∫fdQ for every bounded, measurable, increasing real function fff. Thus stochastic order compares laws through all bounded increasing observations, including observations that depend on several time coordinates. The paper introduces this order on a partially ordered Polish space whose order graph is closed and whose measurable sets are Borel sets in Section 1.

For real-valued paths, ω0\omega^0ω0 is the value at time zero. If the time-zero values under stationary laws PPP and QQQ are integrable, define Ornstein's distance by

dˉ(P,Q)=inf⁡ν∈SSν1=P,ν2=Q∫∣ω10−ω20∣ ν(dω1,dω2).\bar d(P,Q)=\inf_{\substack{\nu\in\mathcal S_S\\\nu_1=P,\,\nu_2=Q}} \int |\omega_1^0-\omega_2^0|\,\nu(d\omega_1,d\omega_2).dˉ(P,Q)=ν∈SS​ν1​=P,ν2​=Q​inf​∫∣ω10​−ω20​∣ν(dω1​,dω2​).

The stationary constraint on ν\nuν is part of the definition. It asks for a matching of the full processes, even though the cost is evaluated at one coordinate. The paper notes that this formula is equivalent to Ornstein's original definition for the processes considered here on p. 910.

Formalization targets

The ordered special case is Lemma 3: if P≺QP\prec QP≺Q, then

dˉ(P,Q)=∫ω0 Q(dω)−∫ω0 P(dω).\bar d(P,Q)=\int\omega^0\,Q(d\omega)-\int\omega^0\,P(d\omega).dˉ(P,Q)=∫ω0Q(dω)−∫ω0P(dω).

The main target is Theorem 8, equation (18). For stationary real process laws P,QP,QP,Q with finite first moments at time zero,

dˉ(P,Q)=∫ω0 P(dω)+∫ω0 Q(dω)−2sup⁡R∈STR≺P,R≺Q∫ω0 R(dω).\bar d(P,Q)= \int\omega^0\,P(d\omega)+\int\omega^0\,Q(d\omega) -2\sup_{\substack{R\in\mathcal S_T\\R\prec P,\,R\prec Q}} \int\omega^0\,R(d\omega).dˉ(P,Q)=∫ω0P(dω)+∫ω0Q(dω)−2R∈ST​R≺P,R≺Q​sup​∫ω0R(dω).

The supremum ranges over stationary laws of whole paths, ordered on the full coordinatewise path space. The milestone list includes Theorem 7's stationary monotone coupling, Lemmas 2 and 3, and three claims made inside the proof of Theorem 8: the triangle inequality dˉ(P,Q)≤dˉ(P,R)+dˉ(R,Q)\bar d(P,Q)\le\bar d(P,R)+\bar d(R,Q)dˉ(P,Q)≤dˉ(P,R)+dˉ(R,Q), which the paper asserts without proof ("since dˉ\bar ddˉ is a distance"), the attainment of the infimum defining dˉ\bar ddˉ, and the fact that the law of the coordinatewise minimum of an optimal stationary coupling lies below both PPP and QQQ. These are the statements from the paper that delimit the target.

Significance

The identity expresses a distance defined through stationary joint distributions using only stationary laws below both inputs in stochastic order. It therefore links a coupling cost to an order-theoretic optimization. In the ordered case, Lemma 3 evaluates the distance directly from the difference of means. The authors point out that the general formula replaces an infimum over laws on a product path space by a supremum over laws on one path space on p. 911.

The 1977 results are proved on paper; these mission statements are open Lean proof targets. A completed formalization would supply reusable definitions for stationary path laws, stationary couplings, stochastic order on path spaces, and dˉ\bar ddˉ, together with checked statements about their interaction. It would also make the closed-order and first-moment conditions explicit at every point where a subsequent result uses them. The separate mission for Theorem 1 contains the general coupling characterization that the paper invokes in Theorem 7.

Difficulty

The cost in dˉ\bar ddˉ inspects only time zero, but admissibility of a coupling involves every time coordinate at once. An arbitrary coupling of the time-zero marginals need not extend to a stationary coupling of the two processes. The stationary-coupling existence statement must preserve both full path marginals and the coordinatewise order. On the optimization side, taking an infimum in the real numbers is justified only after the coupling class is shown nonempty and its costs are finite; attaining the infimum requires more than those two facts. These are the obstacles made explicit by Theorem 7 and the proof of Theorem 8.

Formalization scope

The Lean path space is Z→E\mathbb Z\to EZ→E, with Mathlib's product topology, Borel measurable structure, and coordinatewise order. The shift sends coordinate nnn to the old coordinate n+1n+1n+1. For Theorem 7, EEE carries the paper's standing assumptions: it is Polish, its order is a closed partial order, and its measurable structure is Borel. Measurability of quantified functions is explicit, following the paper's convention that sets and functions under discussion are measurable. Theorem 8 and its Section 8 milestones specialize to E=RE=\mathbb RE=R.

The real-valued definition of dˉ\bar ddˉ takes the infimum over jointly stationary probability couplings with the specified full path marginals. Under the target's finite-first-moment hypotheses, the product coupling makes this class nonempty, every displayed cost is integrable, and costs are bounded below by zero. The goal states the supremum with an explicit finite least upper bound. It considers common lower laws with an integrable time-zero coordinate: such laws give the finite values intended by the paper, and this restriction does not remove the optimal value. These choices exclude totalized integrals and default real infima or suprema from supplying a spurious identity. Theorem 7's support condition is concentration on the closed set of ordered path pairs.

Reusable contributions include general facts about stationary measures on countable products, measurable coordinatewise order and meet maps, and stationary coupling compactness. The target specifically requires the order to test bounded increasing functions on the full path space; replacing it with a comparison of time-zero marginals would give a different claim. Likewise, dropping the joint stationarity constraint from the definition of dˉ\bar ddˉ would turn it into the Kantorovich (Wasserstein-1) distance of the time-zero marginals, a different and in general smaller quantity; the formalization keeps that constraint. The source is the published Annals of Probability version; throughout this mission printed page === PDF page +898+898+898.

Selected references

  • T. Kamae, U. Krengel, and G. L. O'Brien, Stochastic Inequalities on Partially Ordered Spaces, The Annals of Probability 5(6), 899–912, 1977. DOI: 10.1214/aop/1176995659.
13 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Scheduling Based on Due Dates and Buffer Priorities 2: Under Last Buffer First Serve the Number of Parts Stays Bounded, Eventually by (λc(ε)+γ)/(1−ρ−λε)Research Paper

Motivation

Semiconductor wafer fabrication lines are reentrant: a wafer returns to the same photolithography or etching station many times along its route, so the parts competing for a machine are at different stages of completion. In such a line, a local dispatching rule decides at every machine which waiting part goes next, and the question is whether a given rule keeps the line stable whenever there is enough capacity. Lu and Kumar (IEEE TAC 36(12), 1991) showed that the answer depends on the rule. Some natural buffer priority rules make the line unstable even when every machine has spare capacity (their Example 1; see also Kumar and Seidman 1990). Two rules are proved stable for every route: first buffer first serve (FBFS) and last buffer first serve (LBFS).

LBFS serves at each machine the waiting part that is closest to completion. It is the "pull" rule of the two, and the one closer to practice: it minimizes work in progress in many settings and coincides with earliest due date when parts arrive in due-date order. This mission formalizes the paper's LBFS results, §V. The sibling mission (FBFS, §IV) treats the other policy on the same model.

Timeline:

  • 1990: Kumar and Seidman exhibit instability of clearing policies on a reentrant line with spare capacity.
  • 1991: Lu and Kumar prove stability of FBFS (Theorem 1) and of LBFS (Theorems 2–3) under deterministic bursty arrivals. They also prove it for least slack and earliest due date (Theorem 4, Corollary 1), and show that a buffer priority policy can be unstable (Example 1).
  • 1996: Dai and Weiss prove stability of the fluid models of FBFS and LBFS on reentrant lines (Math. Oper. Res. 21(1)), which by Dai's fluid limit theorem gives positive Harris recurrence for the stochastic versions.

Setting

A nonacyclic flow line has SSS service centers; center σ\sigmaσ has mσ≥1m_\sigma \ge 1mσ​≥1 identical machines, each processing one part at a time. Every part follows the same route through buffers b1,…,blb_1, \dots, b_lb1​,…,bl​: in buffer bib_ibi​ it waits at center σi\sigma_iσi​, then needs τi>0\tau_i > 0τi​>0 units of uninterrupted processing on one machine of that center. A center may serve several buffers.

Parts are released into b1b_1b1​; part π\piπ is released at time α(π)\alpha(\pi)α(π) and exits at time e(π)e(\pi)e(π), when its service at blb_lbl​ ends. Finitely many parts may be present at time 000, in any buffer, some already in service. With u(t)u(t)u(t) the number of releases in [0,t][0,t][0,t], the arrivals are bursty with rate λ\lambdaλ and burst γ\gammaγ if

u(t)−u(s)≤λ(t−s)+γ(0≤s≤t).(1)u(t)-u(s)\le \lambda(t-s)+\gamma\qquad(0\le s\le t).\tag{1}u(t)−u(s)≤λ(t−s)+γ(0≤s≤t).(1)

The work per machine that one part brings to center σ\sigmaσ is wσ=∑i:σi=στi/mσw_\sigma=\sum_{i:\sigma_i=\sigma}\tau_i/m_\sigmawσ​=∑i:σi​=σ​τi​/mσ​, and the load is ρ=λw‾\rho=\lambda\overline wρ=λw with w‾=max⁡σwσ\overline w=\max_\sigma w_\sigmaw=maxσ​wσ​. The capacity condition is ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 (3). Also τ‾=max⁡jτj\overline\tau=\max_j\tau_jτ=maxj​τj​, and w(k)w^{(k)}w(k) is the maximum per-machine work brought to a center by a part in bkb_kbk​, counting only buffers bk,…,blb_k,\dots,b_lbk​,…,bl​ (6).

Scheduling is nonidling (a machine idles only if every buffer of its center is empty) and nonpreemptive, and a machine takes the part at the head of a buffer. Under LBFS, a machine takes a part from bib_ibi​ only if every buffer bjb_jbj​ of its center with j>ij>ij>i is empty. The number of parts in the system at time ttt is x(t)x(t)x(t).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3, Stability of LBFS

Under (1) and (3), for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 with 1−ρ−λε>01-\rho-\lambda\varepsilon>01−ρ−λε>0,

x(t)≤max⁡{(1+ρ+λε)x(0)+λc(ε)+γ, 2(λc(ε)+γ)1−ρ−λε}(t≥0),x(t)\le\max\Big\{(1+\rho+\lambda\varepsilon)x(0)+\lambda c(\varepsilon)+\gamma,\ \frac{2(\lambda c(\varepsilon)+\gamma)}{1-\rho-\lambda\varepsilon}\Big\}\quad(t\ge0),x(t)≤max{(1+ρ+λε)x(0)+λc(ε)+γ, 1−ρ−λε2(λc(ε)+γ)​}(t≥0), lim sup⁡t→∞x(t)≤λc(ε)+γ1−ρ−λε.\limsup_{t\to\infty}x(t)\le\frac{\lambda c(\varepsilon)+\gamma}{1-\rho-\lambda\varepsilon}.t→∞limsup​x(t)≤1−ρ−λελc(ε)+γ​.

Here c(ε)c(\varepsilon)c(ε) is the explicit constant of the delay estimate. The paper prints the second bound as λc(ε)+γ/(1−ρ−λε)\lambda c(\varepsilon)+\gamma/(1-\rho-\lambda\varepsilon)λc(ε)+γ/(1−ρ−λε); its proof establishes the form above, which is the one posed.

Milestones

The delay estimate behind the goal, in the order of its proof:

  • the base case (8) for the last buffer;
  • the one-step comparison (11) with the part just ahead;
  • the induction claim (10) for every truncated line B(k)={bk,…,bl}B^{(k)}=\{b_k,\dots,b_l\}B(k)={bk​,…,bl​}: a part in B(k)B^{(k)}B(k) with xxx parts ahead exits within c(k)(ε)+(w(k)+ε)xc^{(k)}(\varepsilon)+(w^{(k)}+\varepsilon)xc(k)(ε)+(w(k)+ε)x;
  • Theorem 2, the contractive estimate
e(π)−α(π)≤c(ε)+(w‾+ε)x(ε>0),e(\pi)-\alpha(\pi)\le c(\varepsilon)+(\overline w+\varepsilon)x\qquad(\varepsilon>0),e(π)−α(π)≤c(ε)+(w+ε)x(ε>0),

for a part that finds xxx parts in the system on release.

Then the Pipeline Property e(π)−α(π)≤w‾x+o(x)e(\pi)-\alpha(\pi)\le\overline wx+o(x)e(π)−α(π)≤wx+o(x), order preservation (parts exit in the order they enter), and the recursion (14) for the number in system along successive exit times. A further item states that LBFS is stable in the sense of §II: every delay e(π)−α(π)e(\pi)-\alpha(\pi)e(π)−α(π) is bounded.

Significance

Theorem 2 says the delay of a part under LBFS grows with the number of parts ahead at rate w‾+ε\overline w+\varepsilonw+ε: the line behaves like a pipeline whose speed is set by its bottleneck center, although parts revisit centers. Theorem 3 converts this into a bound on work in progress that holds for all time, with an asymptotic bound that does not depend on the initial state. Together they give stability of LBFS for every route and every burst size, with explicit constants. This is a deterministic, sample-path result: no distributional assumption on arrivals is needed. Its constants are explicit, so they can be evaluated for a given line.

The results are proved in the paper; none is formalized. The mission produces a machine-checked model of a multi-server reentrant line with nonidling, nonpreemptive, head-of-buffer buffer-priority dispatch, together with Theorems 2 and 3 on it. The model carries over to the other policies of the paper (FBFS, least slack, earliest due date).

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails because under LBFS parts released later do interfere with a part π\piπ: they occupy machines nonpreemptively at the low-priority buffers π\piπ must still pass. So the delay of π\piπ cannot be bounded by the work ahead of it alone. The paper's estimate is an induction from the end of the line backwards over the truncated systems B(k)B^{(k)}B(k), nested with an induction on the position of π\piπ in its buffer. The constant c(k)(ε)c^{(k)}(\varepsilon)c(k)(ε) is recomputed at every level from c(k+1)(ε/2)c^{(k+1)}(\varepsilon/2)c(k+1)(ε/2), so ε\varepsilonε is halved at each level. A formal proof must also handle what the paper treats informally:

  • the order in which parts leave buffers when several arrive at the same instant;
  • parts already in service at time 000;
  • an empty system between busy periods.

Formalization scope

All declarations are in the namespace ReentrantScheduling.LBFS.

  • Buffers are 0-based in Lean: the paper's bib_ibi​ is index i−1i-1i−1.
  • A run lists its parts in a fixed line order: parts present at time 000 first (deeper buffers first, then earlier service start), then released parts by release time. This order breaks ties between simultaneous arrivals, and "parts ahead of π\piπ" means the parts in the system that precede π\piπ in it.
  • Service start times are in WithTop ℝ, with ⊤ meaning never, so a run need not serve every part, and the theorems assert that parts are served. A formalization with real-valued start times would assume every part is served, which is half of what stability asserts.
  • All counts (capacity, nonidling, (1), x(t)x(t)x(t)) are Set.encard, never Set.ncard, which would count an infinite set as 000 and make the capacity rule vacuous.
  • The constants c(k)(ε)c^{(k)}(\varepsilon)c(k)(ε) of (8)–(9) are explicit definitions that depend only on the line and ε\varepsilonε. A constant chosen after the run would let it depend on the arrivals or the initial state.
  • Theorem 3's bounds are inequalities in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; the lim sup is taken there, so it cannot be a junk value of an unbounded real function.
  • The standing assumptions of §II are hypotheses or part of the run predicate: nonidling, nonpreemptive, head-of-buffer service, mσ≥1m_\sigma\ge1mσ​≥1, l≥1l\ge1l≥1. The positivity τi>0\tau_i>0τi​>0 is pinned: the paper leaves it implicit.
  • Every theorem quantifies over all admissible LBFS runs. The empty run and nontrivial runs satisfy the hypotheses.

The model is reusable for other dispatch rules on reentrant lines. Proofs of any milestone are welcome, as are lemmas on admissible runs (FIFO within buffers, finiteness of x(t)x(t)x(t)).

Not posed here:

  • Example 1, which is already on the platform as QueueingStability.LuKumar.theorem31;
  • Theorem 4 and Corollary 1 (least slack, earliest due date), whose proof modifications the paper leaves to the reader;
  • Theorem 5 (several flow lines), whose proof is a sketch.

Selected references

  • S. H. Lu and P. R. Kumar, Distributed Scheduling Based on Due Dates and Buffer Priorities, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 36(12), 1406–1416, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.106156
  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic Instabilities and Stabilization Methods in Distributed Real-Time Scheduling of Manufacturing Systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 35(3), 289–298, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • J. G. Dai and G. Weiss, Stability and Instability of Fluid Models for Reentrant Lines, Mathematics of Operations Research 21(1), 115–134, 1996. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.21.1.115
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Distributed Scheduling Based on Due Dates and Buffer Priorities 1: First Buffer First Serve Is Stable on Every Nonacyclic Flow Line Whose Bursty Arrival Rate Is Below CapacityResearch Paper

Motivation

Semiconductor wafer fabs are the standard example of a reentrant manufacturing line: a wafer visits the same lithography or etching station many times along a route of hundreds of steps, so each station holds parts at many different stages of completion and must decide, every time a machine frees up, which of them to serve next. Kumar (Re-entrant lines, Queueing Systems 13, 1993) singled these lines out as a third class of manufacturing systems besides flow shops and job shops, and stability of their scheduling policies became a central question in the analysis of queueing networks.

The question is sharp because the obvious conjecture is false. Kumar and Seidman (IEEE TAC 35(3), 1990) gave a deterministic network in which a distributed policy is unstable although every machine has spare capacity, and Lu and Kumar (IEEE TAC 36(12), 1991, Example 1, p. 1409) gave a two-station reentrant line in which a buffer priority policy is unstable at load below one. Their paper then identifies policies that are always stable: first buffer first serve (FBFS, Theorem 1), last buffer first serve (Theorem 3) and the due-date policies least slack and earliest due date (Theorem 4). This mission formalizes Theorem 1.

Timeline:

  • 1990: Kumar and Seidman exhibit instability of clear-a-fraction policies under load below one.
  • 1991: Lu and Kumar prove FBFS and LBFS stable on every nonacyclic flow line with deterministic bursty arrivals, and exhibit an unstable buffer priority policy.
  • 1995–1996: Dai (Ann. Appl. Probab. 5(1), 1995) reduces positive Harris recurrence of multiclass networks to stability of fluid models; Dai and Weiss (Math. Oper. Res. 21(1), 1996) prove the FBFS and LBFS fluid models of reentrant lines stable.

Setting

A nonacyclic flow line has SSS service centers; center σ\sigmaσ has mσ≥1m_\sigma\ge1mσ​≥1 identical machines in parallel, each working on one part at a time. Every part follows the same route: it visits buffers b1,b2,…,blb_1,b_2,\dots,b_lb1​,b2​,…,bl​ in order, buffer bib_ibi​ sits at center σi\sigma_iσi​, and a part in bib_ibi​ needs τi>0\tau_i>0τi​>0 time units of uninterrupted processing on one machine of σi\sigma_iσi​. The same center may appear many times along the route.

Parts enter at b1b_1b1​; part π\piπ is released at time α(π)\alpha(\pi)α(π). The releases are deterministic but may be bursty: with u(t)u(t)u(t) the number of parts released in [0,t][0,t][0,t],

u(t)−u(s)≤λ(t−s)+γfor all 0≤s≤t,(1)u(t)-u(s)\le\lambda(t-s)+\gamma\qquad\text{for all }0\le s\le t,\tag{1}u(t)−u(s)≤λ(t−s)+γfor all 0≤s≤t,(1)

for constants λ,γ≥0\lambda,\gamma\ge0λ,γ≥0. Each part brings wσ=∑i:σi=στi/mσw_\sigma=\sum_{i:\sigma_i=\sigma}\tau_i/m_\sigmawσ​=∑i:σi​=σ​τi​/mσ​ units of work per machine to center σ\sigmaσ, and the load is ρ=max⁡σλwσ\rho=\max_\sigma\lambda w_\sigmaρ=maxσ​λwσ​. The arrival rate is within capacity when ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 (3). At time 000 the line may hold finitely many initial parts in arbitrary buffers, some of them already in service.

A schedule is nonidling (a machine idles only if every buffer of its center is empty), nonpreemptive (a started service runs to completion) and serves the part at the head of the chosen buffer. Under FBFS a free machine at center σ\sigmaσ takes a part from bib_ibi​ only if every buffer bjb_jbj​ of σ\sigmaσ with j<ij<ij<i is empty. With e(π)e(\pi)e(π) the time part π\piπ exits after its service at blb_lbl​, the schedule is stable if there is Γ≥0\Gamma\ge0Γ≥0 with

e(π)−α(π)≤Γfor all parts π.(4)e(\pi)-\alpha(\pi)\le\Gamma\qquad\text{for all parts }\pi.\tag{4}e(π)−α(π)≤Γfor all parts π.(4)

Γ\GammaΓ may depend on the initial state as well as on λ\lambdaλ.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 1409)

For every line, every λ,γ≥0\lambda,\gamma\ge0λ,γ≥0 with ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1, and every admissible FBFS run whose releases satisfy (1),

∃ Γ≥0  ∀π:e(π)≤α(π)+Γ.\exists\,\Gamma\ge0\ \ \forall\pi:\quad e(\pi)\le\alpha(\pi)+\Gamma .∃Γ≥0  ∀π:e(π)≤α(π)+Γ.

The statement fixes no constant: Γ\GammaΓ is chosen after the run.

Milestones (proof of Theorem 1, pp. 1409–1410)

An interval [T1,T2][T_1,T_2][T1​,T2​] is an iii-busy period if at every instant some part waits in a buffer bjb_jbj​, j≤ij\le ij≤i, at center σi\sigma_iσi​. With τˉ=max⁡jτj\bar\tau=\max_j\tau_jτˉ=maxj​τj​, Γˉi=∑j<i(Γ(j)+τj)\bar\Gamma_i=\sum_{j<i}(\Gamma^{(j)}+\tau_j)Γˉi​=∑j<i​(Γ(j)+τj​) and

Γ(i)=[2τˉ+∑σj=σi, j≤iλτjΓˉi+γτjmσi][1−∑σj=σi, j≤iλτjmσi]−1,\Gamma^{(i)}=\Big[2\bar\tau+\sum_{\sigma_j=\sigma_i,\,j\le i}\frac{\lambda\tau_j\bar\Gamma_i+\gamma\tau_j}{m_{\sigma_i}}\Big]\Big[1-\sum_{\sigma_j=\sigma_i,\,j\le i}\frac{\lambda\tau_j}{m_{\sigma_i}}\Big]^{-1},Γ(i)=[2τˉ+σj​=σi​,j≤i∑​mσi​​λτj​Γˉi​+γτj​​][1−σj​=σi​,j≤i∑​mσi​​λτj​​]−1,
  1. a 1-busy period commencing at T1>0T_1>0T1​>0 has T2−T1≤Γ(1)T_2-T_1\le\Gamma^{(1)}T2​−T1​≤Γ(1);
  2. there are finite times T(i)T^{(i)}T(i) after which every iii-busy period has length at most Γ(i)\Gamma^{(i)}Γ(i);
  3. a part arriving at bjb_jbj​ after T(j)T^{(j)}T(j) leaves bjb_jbj​ within Γ(j)+τj\Gamma^{(j)}+\tau_jΓ(j)+τj​;
  4. a part released after T(l)T^{(l)}T(l) has delay at most ∑j=1l(Γ(j)+τj)\sum_{j=1}^l(\Gamma^{(j)}+\tau_j)∑j=1l​(Γ(j)+τj​).

Milestone 4 has an explicit bound independent of the initial state; the goal additionally covers the finitely many parts present or released during the transient.

Significance

Theorem 1 says that the simplest "push" discipline, always serving the earliest stage first, keeps every part's delay bounded on every reentrant line whose stations have spare capacity, for every initial state and every bursty but rate-limited release pattern. By Little's law it also bounds the work in process. Together with Example 1 it shows that stability is a property of the policy, not of the load condition alone, and it gave one of the first two positive results for a whole class of reentrant lines. The explicit constants Γ(i)\Gamma^{(i)}Γ(i) make the delay guarantee quantitative after the transient.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as the platform record shows it has not been formalized: the related platform items concern the fluid models of Dai and Weiss, which have no parts, no burstiness and no nonpreemption, and a fixed instance of Example 1. This mission produces a machine-checked sample-path model of reentrant lines under buffer priority policies and a checked proof of Theorem 1 with its explicit busy-period constants. The same model serves the sibling mission on LBFS (Theorem 3 of the paper).

Difficulty

A first idea is a work-conservation argument per center: total work arriving at σ\sigmaσ grows at rate ρ<1\rho<1ρ<1 per machine, so the center cannot fall behind. This fails because the work arriving at a center σ\sigmaσ from a later buffer bib_ibi​ depends on how fast the upstream centers have pushed parts to bib_ibi​, and an upstream center can release a burst that the downstream center absorbs only after other buffers have starved; Example 1 is exactly such a cascade under a different priority order. Any argument must therefore bound the delay of a part at a buffer in terms of delays it suffered upstream at other centers, uniformly in the initial state, while nonpreemption lets a part wait up to τˉ\bar\tauτˉ for a machine busy with a lower-priority buffer and the release constraint (1) controls only arrivals to b1b_1b1​, not to later buffers. On sample paths one must also show that the initial parts clear in finite time and that only finitely many parts are served in any bounded interval.

Formalization scope

Lean represents a line by a structure with SSS, mσ>0m_\sigma>0mσ​>0, l>0l>0l>0, the route center : Fin l → Fin S and processing times τ with τi>0\tau_i>0τi​>0. The positivity is a pinned hypothesis: the paper leaves it implicit, its proof divides by τ1\tau_1τ1​, and its only zero processing times are those of Example 1. Buffers are 0-based: the paper's bib_ibi​ is Lean index i−1i-1i−1. The load is written λwˉ\lambda\bar wλwˉ, equal to max⁡σλwσ\max_\sigma\lambda w_\sigmamaxσ​λwσ​ for λ≥0\lambda\ge0λ≥0.

A run is a type of parts with an injective line order, a finite set of initial parts, entry buffers, release times, and for each part and buffer the start of service in WithTop ℝ, ⊤\top⊤ meaning never served. Admissibility imposes, at every t≥0t\ge0t≥0: precedence (service begins after arrival, except that initial parts may be in service at time 000), capacity mσm_\sigmamσ​, nonidling, head of buffer with ties broken by the line order, and the priority rule. All counts use Set.encard. The theorems hold for every admissible run, not for one particular tie-breaking schedule. The constants Γ(i)\Gamma^{(i)}Γ(i) are definitions computed from the line and λ,γ\lambda,\gammaλ,γ; the times T(i)T^{(i)}T(i) are existential after the run.

Two trivializing formalizations are ruled out: start times in ℝ would make every part served by construction and stability half empty, and a capacity constraint stated with Set.ncard would be vacuous for infinitely many parts. Γ\GammaΓ never depends on the part. A sanity file exhibits a nontrivial admissible run satisfying (1) and checks that the empty run is admissible and stable.

The page prints Γ(i)\Gamma^{(i)}Γ(i) (p. 1410) as a product of the two brackets; the inequality it is solved from gives the quotient, which is also the printed form of Γ(1)\Gamma^{(1)}Γ(1), and the formalization uses the quotient.

The sample-path model (Line, Run, Admissible, Arrivals, Stable) is reusable for any buffer priority policy and for the LBFS mission. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones in the listed order, lemmas on finiteness of the parts served in bounded time, and interval-counting lemmas for busy periods. Not posed here: Example 1, which is already on the platform as an open problem (QueueingStability.LuKumar.theorem31), Theorems 2–3 (LBFS, sibling mission), Theorems 4–5 and Corollary 1 (due-date policies, several flow lines).

Selected references

  • S. H. Lu and P. R. Kumar, Distributed Scheduling Based on Due Dates and Buffer Priorities, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 36(12), 1991, pp. 1406–1416. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.106156
  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic instabilities and stabilization methods in distributed real-time scheduling of manufacturing systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 35(3), 1990, pp. 289–298. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • P. R. Kumar, Re-entrant lines, Queueing Systems 13, 1993, pp. 87–110. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01158927
  • J. G. Dai, On positive Harris recurrence of multiclass queueing networks: a unified approach via fluid limit models, Annals of Applied Probability 5(1), 1995, pp. 49–77. https://doi.org/10.1214/aoap/1177004828
  • J. G. Dai and G. Weiss, Stability and instability of fluid models for reentrant lines, Mathematics of Operations Research 21(1), 1996, pp. 115–134. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.21.1.115
7 thms1 active userReviewed
OptimizationProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

Monte Carlo Bounding Techniques for Determining Solution Quality in Stochastic Programs: The Expected Sample-Average Optimal Value Is a Lower Bound on z* That Improves with Sample SizeResearch Paper

Motivation

Most stochastic programs that arise in practice, such as two-stage stochastic linear programs with recourse, have far too many scenarios to be solved exactly. The standard remedy is sample-average approximation: draw nnn independent observations of the random data, replace the expectation by the sample mean, and solve the resulting deterministic problem. A candidate solution x^\hat xx^ found this way, or by any heuristic, comes with no guarantee. To judge it one needs a bound on its optimality gap Ef(x^,ξ~)−z∗Ef(\hat x,\tilde\xi)-z^*Ef(x^,ξ~​)−z∗, and estimating Ef(x^,ξ~)Ef(\hat x,\tilde\xi)Ef(x^,ξ~​) is routine; what is missing is a lower bound on the unknown optimal value z∗z^*z∗.

Mak, Morton and Wood (Oper. Res. Lett. 24 (1999)) show that the optimal value of the sample-average problem supplies exactly this: its expectation never exceeds z∗z^*z∗, and it can only move closer to z∗z^*z∗ as the sample size grows. The result requires almost no structure of the problem, and it underlies the batch-means confidence intervals on the optimality gap used throughout the stochastic programming literature, including the single- and two-replication procedures of Bayraksan and Morton (2006).

Timeline.

  • 1960: Madansky's wait-and-see bound z∗≥Emin⁡x∈Xf(x,ξ~)z^*\ge E\min_{x\in X}f(x,\tilde\xi)z∗≥Eminx∈X​f(x,ξ~​) (Management Sci. 6), the case n=1n=1n=1 of the result.
  • 1998: Norkin, Pflug and Ruszczyński use stochastic lower bounds of this kind inside a branch-and-bound method (Math. Programming 83); the paper notes that they verified the monotonicity independently.
  • 1999: Mak, Morton and Wood prove Ezn∗≤z∗Ez_n^*\le z^*Ezn∗​≤z∗ (Theorem 1) for arbitrary XXX and Ezn∗≤Ezn+1∗Ez_n^*\le Ez_{n+1}^*Ezn∗​≤Ezn+1∗​ (Theorem 2), and build confidence intervals on the optimality gap from them.

Setting

Let ξ~\tilde\xiξ~​ be a random vector with distribution μ\muμ on a measurable space Ξ\XiΞ, let X⊆RdX\subseteq\mathbb R^dX⊆Rd be a deterministic feasible set, and let f:Rd×Ξ→Rf:\mathbb R^d\times\Xi\to\mathbb Rf:Rd×Ξ→R. The stochastic program is

SPz∗=min⁡x∈XEf(x,ξ~),x∗∈arg⁡min⁡x∈XEf(x,ξ~).\mathrm{SP}\qquad z^*=\min_{x\in X}Ef(x,\tilde\xi),\qquad x^*\in\arg\min_{x\in X}Ef(x,\tilde\xi).SPz∗=x∈Xmin​Ef(x,ξ~​),x∗∈argx∈Xmin​Ef(x,ξ~​).

Let ξ~1,ξ~2,…\tilde\xi^1,\tilde\xi^2,\dotsξ~​1,ξ~​2,… be independent and identically distributed (i.i.d.) from the distribution of ξ~\tilde\xiξ~​, defined on a probability space (Ω,P)(\Omega,P)(Ω,P). The sample-average problem of size n≥1n\ge1n≥1 is

SPnzn∗=min⁡x∈X1n∑i=1nf(x,ξ~i),xn∗∈arg⁡min⁡x∈X1n∑i=1nf(x,ξ~i).\mathrm{SP}_n\qquad z_n^*=\min_{x\in X}\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f(x,\tilde\xi^i),\qquad x_n^*\in\arg\min_{x\in X}\frac1n\sum_{i=1}^n f(x,\tilde\xi^i).SPn​zn∗​=x∈Xmin​n1​i=1∑n​f(x,ξ~​i),xn∗​∈argx∈Xmin​n1​i=1∑n​f(x,ξ~​i).

Its optimal value zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ is a random variable. All the zm∗z_m^*zm∗​ are built on the same sequence: zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ uses its first nnn terms and zn+1∗z_{n+1}^*zn+1∗​ its first n+1n+1n+1. Throughout, Ef(x,ξ~)Ef(x,\tilde\xi)Ef(x,ξ~​) is assumed to exist for every x∈Xx\in Xx∈X.

For the proof structure the mission also uses the leave-one-out values

zn,(i)∗=min⁡x∈X1n∑j=1j≠in+1f(x,ξ~j),i=1,…,n+1,z_{n,(i)}^*=\min_{x\in X}\frac1n\sum_{\substack{j=1\\j\ne i}}^{n+1}f(x,\tilde\xi^j),\qquad i=1,\dots,n+1,zn,(i)∗​=x∈Xmin​n1​j=1j=i​∑n+1​f(x,ξ~​j),i=1,…,n+1,

the sample-average optimal values of the n+1n+1n+1 subsamples of size nnn of the first n+1n+1n+1 observations.

Formalization targets

Goal: the lower bound improves with the sample size

Ezn∗ ≤ Ezn+1∗ ≤ z∗(n≥1),Ez_n^*\ \le\ Ez_{n+1}^*\ \le\ z^*\qquad(n\ge1),Ezn∗​ ≤ Ezn+1∗​ ≤ z∗(n≥1),

stated in the Introduction (p. 48) as the paper's main claim, with no assumption on XXX or on f(⋅,ξ~)f(\cdot,\tilde\xi)f(⋅,ξ~​) beyond the existence of the relevant expectations and of optimal solutions.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 1 (p. 49): Ezn∗≤z∗Ez_n^*\le z^*Ezn∗​≤z∗.
  2. Proof of Theorem 2 (p. 50), pathwise: 1n+1∑i=1n+1zn,(i)∗≤zn+1∗\frac1{n+1}\sum_{i=1}^{n+1}z_{n,(i)}^*\le z_{n+1}^*n+11​∑i=1n+1​zn,(i)∗​≤zn+1∗​.
  3. Proof of Theorem 2 (p. 50): Ezn,(i)∗=Ezn∗E z_{n,(i)}^*=Ez_n^*Ezn,(i)∗​=Ezn∗​ for every iii.
  4. Theorem 2 (p. 50): Ezn+1∗≥Ezn∗Ez_{n+1}^*\ge Ez_n^*Ezn+1∗​≥Ezn∗​.

Companion statements

  • The remark after Theorem 1 (p. 49): Emin⁡x∈XF(x,⋅)≤z∗E\min_{x\in X}\mathcal F(x,\cdot)\le z^*Eminx∈X​F(x,⋅)≤z∗ for any unbiased estimator F(x,⋅)\mathcal F(x,\cdot)F(x,⋅) of Ef(x,ξ~)Ef(x,\tilde\xi)Ef(x,ξ~​).
  • The wait-and-see bound (p. 50), z∗≥Emin⁡x∈Xf(x,ξ~)z^*\ge E\min_{x\in X}f(x,\tilde\xi)z∗≥Eminx∈X​f(x,ξ~​).
  • Display (9) (p. 52): for x^∈X\hat x\in Xx^∈X and Gn=1n∑if(x^,ξ~i)−zn∗G_n=\frac1n\sum_i f(\hat x,\tilde\xi^i)-z_n^*Gn​=n1​∑i​f(x^,ξ~​i)−zn∗​, Gn≥0G_n\ge0Gn​≥0 and EGn≥Ef(x^,ξ~)−z∗EG_n\ge Ef(\hat x,\tilde\xi)-z^*EGn​≥Ef(x^,ξ~​)−z∗.

Significance

Theorem 1 turns any sampling-based solver into a source of statistical lower bounds on z∗z^*z∗: averaging independent replications of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ gives a confidence interval for a lower bound, and display (9) combines it with an upper-bound estimator into an estimator of the optimality gap that is nonnegative by construction. Theorem 2 justifies increasing the sample size: the bias z∗−Ezn∗z^*-Ez_n^*z∗−Ezn∗​ is nonincreasing in nnn. Both results are used, often without proof, in the analysis of sample-average approximation and of the gap-estimation procedures built on it.

The results are proved, in this paper and in textbooks (e.g. Shapiro, Dentcheva and Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming). To our knowledge none of them is machine-checked. On Prove2Me, a special case of Theorem 1 under continuity, compactness and a square-integrable envelope is posed but unproved (SolutionQuality.SRP.display1_negative_bias), and the wait-and-see inequality is proved for finitely many scenarios in an extended-real model (StochasticProg.ValueOfInfo.prop1_ws_le_rp_le_eev). This mission states the general versions, for arbitrary feasible sets and integrable costs, on a measure-theoretic i.i.d. model.

Difficulty

Theorem 1 is short on paper; in a formal setting its difficulty is bookkeeping: minima over arbitrary sets and expectations of possibly non-integrable functions both need explicit hypotheses to mean what the paper means. Theorem 2 is harder. The natural first attempt compares zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ and zn+1∗z_{n+1}^*zn+1∗​ on the same sample path, but no pathwise inequality holds in either direction: one extra observation can raise or lower the sample-average optimum. The monotonicity holds only in expectation, so any argument must use the joint law of the infinite i.i.d. sequence, including the law of its subsequences, and measurability of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ as a function of the sample path.

Formalization scope

The model is the published definition file SolutionQuality.SRP.Setting: decisions lie in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d), μ\muμ is a probability measure on Ξ\XiΞ, the sample is an i.i.d. sequence ξ : ℕ → Ω → Ξ (the paper's ξ~i\tilde\xi^iξ~​i is ξ (i-1)), and z∗z^*z∗, zn∗z_n^*zn∗​, GnG_nGn​ and the optimality gap are its optValue, saaValue, gapEstimate and optGap. The mission adds skipIndex, the leave-one-out value looValue and the path law pathLaw.

Committed conventions:

  • XXX is an arbitrary set: no convexity, closedness or compactness, and f(⋅,ξ)f(\cdot,\xi)f(⋅,ξ) has no continuity (p. 49: "X need not be convex …").
  • Minima are conditionally complete infima (sInf), and expectations are Bochner integrals. Both take the value 000 on bad inputs, so every statement carries the hypotheses that keep them genuine:
    • integrability of f(x,⋅)f(x,\cdot)f(x,⋅) for x∈Xx\in Xx∈X (the first-moment half of the paper's standing assumption; the second moments are not used and are omitted);
    • attainment of z∗z^*z∗ (the paper's x∗∈arg⁡min⁡x^*\in\arg\minx∗∈argmin);
    • almost-sure attainment of every SPm\mathrm{SP}_mSPm​ (the paper's xm∗∈arg⁡min⁡x_m^*\in\arg\minxm∗​∈argmin), stated for the law of the sample path, or almost-sure boundedness below where that suffices;
    • integrability of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ and zn+1∗z_{n+1}^*zn+1∗​ ("Ezn∗Ez_n^*Ezn∗​ exists");
    • measurability of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ as a function of the sample path ("zn∗z_n^*zn∗​ is a random variable"), for Theorem 2 only. It holds, e.g., for countable XXX or for f(⋅,ξ)f(\cdot,\xi)f(⋅,ξ) continuous on XXX; it fails for arbitrary XXX and fff, which is why it is assumed.
  • n≥1n\ge1n≥1 throughout, since the empty sample mean is 000.

These hypotheses are disclosed in each statement and are satisfiable: a sanity instance with XXX a singleton satisfies all of them. A formalization that dropped the integrability of zn∗z_n^*zn∗​, or that allowed z0∗z_0^*z0∗​, would make the goal false or vacuous, and one that assumed continuity and compactness would restate the special case already on the platform; neither is in scope.

A complete development needs: the expectation of a sample mean under an i.i.d. law; the identification of the law of fun j => ξ (skipIndex i j) · with Measure.infinitePi (fun _ => μ) (Mathlib's iIndepFun_iff_map_fun_eq_infinitePi_map); and the averaging identity behind the leave-one-out decomposition. The reindexing lemma for i.i.d. sequences is reusable well beyond this mission. Proofs of the milestones, and alternative arguments for Theorem 2, are welcome.

Selected references

  • W.-K. Mak, D. P. Morton, R. K. Wood, Monte Carlo bounding techniques for determining solution quality in stochastic programs, Operations Research Letters 24 (1999) 47–56. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0167-6377(98)00054-6
  • A. Madansky, Inequalities for stochastic linear programming problems, Management Science 6 (1960) 197–204. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.6.2.197
  • V. I. Norkin, G. Ch. Pflug, A. Ruszczyński, A branch and bound method for stochastic global optimization, Mathematical Programming 83 (1998) 425–450. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02680569
  • G. Bayraksan, D. P. Morton, Assessing solution quality in stochastic programs, Mathematical Programming 108 (2006) 495–514. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10107-006-0720-x
  • A. Shapiro, D. Dentcheva, A. Ruszczyński, Lectures on Stochastic Programming: Modeling and Theory, SIAM, 2009. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718751
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryDynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Instabilities and Stabilization Methods in Distributed Real-Time Scheduling of Manufacturing Systems 2: Stable and Unstable Modes Coexist Under Clearing on a Two-Part-Type SystemResearch Paper

Motivation

Flexible manufacturing systems are often scheduled by simple distributed rules: each machine looks only at its own buffers and decides, in real time, which part type to work on next. Switching from one part type to another costs a set-up time during which the machine produces nothing, so a natural rule is to work on a buffer until it is empty and only then switch. Perkins and Kumar (IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 34, 1989; reference [18] of the paper) showed that such clearing policies, and in particular clear-a-fraction policies, keep every buffer bounded on acyclic systems whenever each machine has spare capacity. Whether the same holds when material flows around a cycle of machines was left open.

Kumar and Seidman (IEEE TAC 35(3), 1990) answered it negatively by two examples. Example 1 is a single re-entrant part type. Example 2, the subject of this mission, has two part types, neither of which ever revisits a machine, and shows two further phenomena: instability without re-entrance, and the coexistence, for one and the same system, of a bounded periodic regime and an unbounded one, selected only by the initial state.

Setting

A manufacturing system has part types ppp arriving at rates dpd_pdp​ and machines mmm. Parts of type ppp follow a fixed route; at stage iii they wait in buffer bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​ at machine μp,i\mu_{p,i}μp,i​, and processing one of them takes τp,i\tau_{p,i}τp,i​. Switching a machine from buffer bbb to buffer b′b'b′ takes the set-up time δb,b′\delta_{b,b'}δb,b′​. Flows are continuous: xb(t)x_b(t)xb​(t) is the level of buffer bbb, ub(t)u_b(t)ub​(t) and yb(t)y_b(t)yb​(t) are its cumulative input and output, and

xb(t)=xb(0)+ub(t)−yb(t)≥0.x_b(t)=x_b(0)+u_b(t)-y_b(t)\ge 0 .xb​(t)=xb​(0)+ub​(t)−yb​(t)≥0.

A machine works in runs: a set-up for a buffer, then processing it at rate 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ while it is nonempty, and at the rate of its inflow while it is empty. A clearing policy (Definition 1) keeps a machine on a buffer bbb until the first time that bbb is empty and another of its buffers is nonempty, and then sets it up for one of those. The system is stable if sup⁡0≤t<∞xb(t)<∞\sup_{0\le t<\infty}x_b(t)<\inftysup0≤t<∞​xb​(t)<∞ for every buffer bbb.

Example 2 (Fig. 3) has two part types with d1=d2=1d_1=d_2=1d1​=d2​=1 and two machines. Part type 1 visits buffer 1 at machine 1 and then buffer 2 at machine 2; part type 2 visits buffer 3 at machine 2 and then buffer 4 at machine 1. Processing times are τ1,…,τ4\tau_1,\dots,\tau_4τ1​,…,τ4​ and setting up to buffer kkk takes δk>0\delta_k>0δk​>0. The parameters satisfy the capacity condition (1), τ1+τ4<1\tau_1+\tau_4<1τ1​+τ4​<1 and τ2+τ3<1\tau_2+\tau_3<1τ2​+τ3​<1, and

τ2+τ4>1,δ1+δ41−τ1−τ4=δ2+δ31−τ2−τ3=:η,δ4<(1−τ3−τ4)η,δ2<(1−τ1−τ2)η,\tau_2+\tau_4>1,\qquad \frac{\delta_1+\delta_4}{1-\tau_1-\tau_4}=\frac{\delta_2+\delta_3}{1-\tau_2-\tau_3}=:\eta,\qquad \delta_4<(1-\tau_3-\tau_4)\eta,\qquad \delta_2<(1-\tau_1-\tau_2)\eta,τ2​+τ4​>1,1−τ1​−τ4​δ1​+δ4​​=1−τ2​−τ3​δ2​+δ3​​=:η,δ4​<(1−τ3​−τ4​)η,δ2​<(1−τ1​−τ2​)η,

conditions (7)–(10). The paper's feasible instance is (τ1,τ2,τ3,τ4,δ1,δ2,δ3,δ4)=(14,12,14,23,130,15,120,120)(\tau_1,\tau_2,\tau_3,\tau_4,\delta_1,\delta_2,\delta_3,\delta_4)=(\tfrac14,\tfrac12,\tfrac14,\tfrac23,\tfrac1{30},\tfrac15,\tfrac1{20},\tfrac1{20})(τ1​,τ2​,τ3​,τ4​,δ1​,δ2​,δ3​,δ4​)=(41​,21​,41​,32​,301​,51​,201​,201​), with η=1\eta=1η=1. For this system there is exactly one clearing policy.

Formalization targets

Goal: stable and unstable modes coexist

For every parameter set satisfying (1) and (7)–(10):

from x(0)=(0,η,0,η), set-ups (b1,b3): a clearing trajectory exists, and every one is bounded;∃ ξ0 ∀ ξ≥ξ0, from x(0)=(ξ,0,0,0), set-ups (b4,b3): a clearing trajectory exists, and every one has sup⁡t≥0x1(t)=+∞.\begin{aligned} &\text{from } x(0)=(0,\eta,0,\eta),\ \text{set-ups } (b_1,b_3):\ \text{a clearing trajectory exists, and every one is bounded;}\\ &\exists\,\xi_0\ \forall\,\xi\ge\xi_0,\ \text{from } x(0)=(\xi,0,0,0),\ \text{set-ups } (b_4,b_3):\ \text{a clearing trajectory exists, and every one has } \sup_{t\ge0}x_1(t)=+\infty . \end{aligned}​from x(0)=(0,η,0,η), set-ups (b1​,b3​): a clearing trajectory exists, and every one is bounded;∃ξ0​ ∀ξ≥ξ0​, from x(0)=(ξ,0,0,0), set-ups (b4​,b3​): a clearing trajectory exists, and every one has t≥0sup​x1​(t)=+∞.​

Milestones

  1. Case 1, periodic regime: under (1) and (8)–(10), every clearing trajectory from (0,η,0,η)(0,\eta,0,\eta)(0,η,0,η), (b1,b3)(b_1,b_3)(b1​,b3​) satisfies x(η)=(0,η,0,η)x(\eta)=(0,\eta,0,\eta)x(η)=(0,η,0,η) with the same set-ups.
  2. Case 2, Stage 8: under (1) and (7), for large ξ\xiξ, with t9=(ξ+τ2−1(δ1+δ2))/(τ2−1−1)t_9=(\xi+\tau_2^{-1}(\delta_1+\delta_2))/(\tau_2^{-1}-1)t9​=(ξ+τ2−1​(δ1​+δ2​))/(τ2−1​−1): x(t9)=(0,0,t9−δ1,0)x(t_9)=(0,0,t_9-\delta_1,0)x(t9​)=(0,0,t9​−δ1​,0), machine 1 set up for buffer 1, machine 2 for buffer 2.
  3. Case 2, full cycle: under (1) and (7), for large ξ\xiξ, at an explicit time t17t_{17}t17​, x(t17)=(λξ+α,0,0,0)x(t_{17})=(\lambda\xi+\alpha,0,0,0)x(t17​)=(λξ+α,0,0,0) with set-ups (b4,b3)(b_4,b_3)(b4​,b3​), where λ=τ2τ4/((1−τ2)(1−τ4))>1\lambda=\tau_2\tau_4/((1-\tau_2)(1-\tau_4))>1λ=τ2​τ4​/((1−τ2​)(1−τ4​))>1.

Significance

The result shows that stability of a scheduling policy is a property of the initial state as well as of the system: the same parameters admit a bounded periodic orbit and an orbit along which the backlog of buffer 1 is multiplied by λ>1\lambda>1λ>1 in every cycle. The capacity condition (1) holds throughout, so the instability does not come from overload: spare capacity is lost because one machine starves the other. The example also shows that a cycle in the machine graph suffices, without any part type revisiting a machine. Sections IV and V of the paper respond to this by giving a stronger capacity condition under which clear-a-fraction policies are stable, and a supervisory mechanism that stabilizes any policy.

The paper's argument is a stage-by-stage computation of a piecewise-linear trajectory. It has not been machine-checked. A formalization fixes what a clearing trajectory is (including the switching instants at which a buffer is empty but just starting to fill), proves that the trajectories exist and are determined by the initial state, and checks the paper's closed forms. One printed constant is wrong: the offset α\alphaα of the full cycle lacks a final −δ3-\delta_3−δ3​, and the milestone states the corrected value.

Difficulty

The computations within each stage are linear algebra. The difficulty is the event structure. Every stage depends on the order in which the two machines' events occur: whether machine 1 clears buffer 1 before machine 2 has finished its set-ups, whether buffer 2 is still nonempty when buffer 1 empties, and so on. These orderings hold only for ξ\xiξ large, or only because (8) holds with equality and (9)–(10) hold strictly. The periodic regime depends on exact synchronization. In Case 2, a machine processing an empty buffer at the reduced rate must not be forced off it while its other buffer is empty and not yet fed. A proof must also establish existence of each trajectory, not only compute it.

Formalization scope

  • Model. The general system has part types Fin P, machines Fin M, buffers as pairs (p,i)(p,i)(p,i) with Lean index iii for paper stage i+1i+1i+1, real time, and no transport delay or assembly (as in the paper). Example 2 is an instance of this general model, with machines 1, 2 as Lean 0, 1.
  • Runs. Each machine follows a sequence of runs. Run 0 is on the initial set-up and has no set-up phase. Run k≥1k\ge1k≥1 has a set-up phase of length δβk−1,βk\delta_{\beta_{k-1},\beta_k}δβk−1​,βk​​, followed by a processing phase. Runs are never cut during a set-up. If there are infinitely many runs, their start times tend to ∞\infty∞. There is no idling outside runs: a machine serving an empty buffer passes on its inflow.
  • Set-up times. They depend only on the target buffer, and δb,b=0\delta_{b,b}=0δb,b​=0 is never used.
  • Processing law. The rate cap is yb(t)−yb(s)≤(1/τb)⋅y_b(t)-y_b(s)\le(1/\tau_b)\cdotyb​(t)−yb​(s)≤(1/τb​)⋅(processing time of bbb in [s,t][s,t][s,t]). Rate is exactly 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ while the machine is processing a nonempty buffer.
  • Clearing. "Nonempty" in Definition 1 is read as demanding: positive level, or cumulative input strictly increasing from that instant. Under the literal reading the paper's own switching instants would not be "first times", and no clearing trajectory would exist from these initial states. The no-early-exit condition is imposed on the open processing interval.
  • Set up for bbb at ttt. At t>0t>0t>0 this refers to the run whose interval (sk,sk+1](s_k,s_{k+1}](sk​,sk+1​] contains ttt.
  • Ruling out trivial formalizations. The goal asserts existence of a clearing trajectory in both modes, so neither "every trajectory is bounded" nor "every trajectory is unbounded" can hold vacuously. η\etaη is computed from the data rather than pinned by hypotheses, and (8) is an equality.

Contributions welcome: existence and uniqueness of clearing trajectories for the two-machine instance, the event-ordering lemmas for large ξ\xiξ, the restart (time-shift) property of trajectories, and the three milestones.

Selected references

  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic instabilities and stabilization methods in distributed real-time scheduling of manufacturing systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 35(3):289–298, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • J. R. Perkins and P. R. Kumar, Stable, distributed, real-time scheduling of flexible manufacturing/assembly/disassembly systems, IEEE Transactions on Automatic Control 34:139–148, February 1989 (reference [18] of the paper).
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Global Convergence Properties of Conjugate Gradient Methods for Optimization II: Conjugate Gradient Methods with β_k ≥ 0 and Property (*) Are Globally Convergent under Sufficient DescentResearch Paper

Motivation

Nonlinear conjugate gradient methods minimize a smooth function fff of nnn variables using only function values, gradients and a few vectors of storage. They are the standard choice when nnn is too large for quasi-Newton matrices, and they remain building blocks of large-scale solvers in optimization, scientific computing and machine learning. The method of Polak and Ribière (1969) is usually the most efficient member of the family in practice, but Powell (1984, doi:10.1007/BFb0099521) showed that, even with exact line searches, it can cycle forever without approaching a stationary point. The Fletcher–Reeves method, by contrast, has a global convergence theory (Zoutendijk 1970; Al-Baali 1985, doi:10.1093/imanum/5.1.121) but is often slow.

Powell (1985, report DAMTP 1985/NA1; published in SIAM Review 1986) suggested truncating the Polak–Ribière scalar at zero. Gilbert and Nocedal, in the INRIA research report that became SIAM J. Optim. 2 (1992) 21–42, proved that this truncation, and a whole class of methods sharing a structural property with Polak–Ribière, converge globally with practical inexact line searches. This mission formalizes that result (§4 of the report).

Timeline. 1952: Hestenes and Stiefel, linear conjugate gradients. 1964: Fletcher and Reeves, nonlinear extension. 1969: Polak–Ribière and Polyak. 1970: Zoutendijk, convergence of Fletcher–Reeves with exact searches. 1984: Powell, a nonconvergent Polak–Ribière example. 1985: Al-Baali, Fletcher–Reeves with strong Wolfe searches. 1990/1992: Gilbert and Nocedal, the present results.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real inner product space and f:E→Rf : E \to \mathbb Rf:E→R continuously differentiable with gradient ggg. From x1x_1x1​, a conjugate gradient run produces directions and iterates

d1=−g1,dk=−gk+βkdk−1 (k≥2),xk+1=xk+αkdk,d_1 = -g_1,\qquad d_k = -g_k + \beta_k d_{k-1}\ (k\ge2),\qquad x_{k+1} = x_k + \alpha_k d_k,d1​=−g1​,dk​=−gk​+βk​dk−1​ (k≥2),xk+1​=xk​+αk​dk​,

with gk=g(xk)g_k = g(x_k)gk​=g(xk​), a scalar βk\beta_kβk​, and a steplength αk>0\alpha_k > 0αk​>0 chosen by a line search. Write sk−1=xk−xk−1s_{k-1} = x_k - x_{k-1}sk−1​=xk​−xk−1​.

Assumptions 2.1: the level set L={x:f(x)≤f(x1)}\mathcal L = \{x : f(x) \le f(x_1)\}L={x:f(x)≤f(x1​)} is bounded, and on an open neighbourhood N\mathcal NN of L\mathcal LL the gradient is Lipschitz: ∥g(x)−g(x~)∥≤L∥x−x~∥\|g(x) - g(\tilde x)\| \le L\|x-\tilde x\|∥g(x)−g(x~)∥≤L∥x−x~∥.

The line search is described only through three properties:

  1. the iterates stay in L\mathcal LL (4.4);
  2. the Zoutendijk condition ∑kcos⁡2θk∥gk∥2<∞\sum_k \cos^2\theta_k\|g_k\|^2 < \infty∑k​cos2θk​∥gk​∥2<∞ (2.7), where cos⁡θk=−⟨gk,dk⟩/(∥gk∥∥dk∥)\cos\theta_k = -\langle g_k,d_k\rangle/(\|g_k\|\|d_k\|)cosθk​=−⟨gk​,dk​⟩/(∥gk​∥∥dk​∥);
  3. the sufficient descent condition ⟨gk,dk⟩≤−σ3∥gk∥2\langle g_k,d_k\rangle \le -\sigma_3\|g_k\|^2⟨gk​,dk​⟩≤−σ3​∥gk​∥2, 0<σ3≤10<\sigma_3\le10<σ3​≤1 (4.1).

Property (*): whenever 0<γ≤∥gk∥≤γˉ0 < \gamma \le \|g_k\| \le \bar\gamma0<γ≤∥gk​∥≤γˉ​ for all kkk, there are b>1b > 1b>1 and λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 with

∣βk∣≤band∥sk−1∥≤λ  ⟹  ∣βk∣≤12b(k≥2).|\beta_k| \le b \qquad\text{and}\qquad \|s_{k-1}\|\le\lambda \implies |\beta_k| \le \tfrac{1}{2b}\qquad(k\ge2).∣βk​∣≤band∥sk−1​∥≤λ⟹∣βk​∣≤2b1​(k≥2).

Finally uk=dk/∥dk∥u_k = d_k/\|d_k\|uk​=dk​/∥dk​∥ and Kk,Δλ={i:k≤i≤k+Δ−1, i≥2, ∥si−1∥>λ}\mathcal K^\lambda_{k,\Delta} = \{i : k \le i \le k+\Delta-1,\ i\ge2,\ \|s_{i-1}\|>\lambda\}Kk,Δλ​={i:k≤i≤k+Δ−1, i≥2, ∥si−1​∥>λ}.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.3

If Assumptions 2.1 hold, gk≠0g_k \ne 0gk​=0 for all kkk, βk≥0\beta_k \ge 0βk​≥0, the line search has properties 1–3, and Property (*) holds, then

lim inf⁡k→∞∥gk∥=0.\liminf_{k\to\infty}\|g_k\| = 0.k→∞liminf​∥gk​∥=0.

Milestones

  • Lemma 4.1. With βk≥0\beta_k\ge0βk​≥0, the Zoutendijk and sufficient descent conditions, and ∥gk∥≥γ>0\|g_k\|\ge\gamma>0∥gk​∥≥γ>0 for all kkk (4.3): dk≠0d_k\ne0dk​=0 and ∑k≥2∥uk−uk−1∥2<∞\sum_{k\ge2}\|u_k-u_{k-1}\|^2<\infty∑k≥2​∥uk​−uk−1​∥2<∞.
  • Lemma 4.2. With properties 1–3, Property (*) and (4.3): there is λ>0\lambda>0λ>0 such that for every Δ≥1\Delta\ge1Δ≥1 and k0k_0k0​ some k≥k0k\ge k_0k≥k0​ has ∣Kk,Δλ∣>Δ/2|\mathcal K^\lambda_{k,\Delta}|>\Delta/2∣Kk,Δλ​∣>Δ/2.

Further statements

  • The Polak–Ribière method has Property (*) (p. 13), for βk=⟨gk,gk−gk−1⟩/∥gk−1∥2\beta_k = \langle g_k, g_k-g_{k-1}\rangle/\|g_{k-1}\|^2βk​=⟨gk​,gk​−gk−1​⟩/∥gk−1​∥2.
  • Corollary 4.4. βk=max⁡{βkPR,0}\beta_k=\max\{\beta_k^{PR},0\}βk​=max{βkPR​,0} with Wolfe steps and sufficient descent gives lim inf⁡∥gk∥=0\liminf\|g_k\|=0liminf∥gk​∥=0.

Significance

Theorem 4.3 separates what a convergence proof needs from the method (nonnegativity and Property (*) of βk\beta_kβk​) from what it needs from the line search (three abstract properties). It therefore applies at once to the truncated Polak–Ribière and Hestenes–Stiefel methods, to their absolute-value variants, and to any line search, exact or inexact, that delivers the three properties. Corollary 4.4 is the guarantee behind the "PR+" rule that is the default in many nonlinear conjugate gradient codes; Powell's example shows that dropping βk≥0\beta_k\ge0βk​≥0 breaks it.

The results are proved in the paper, not open. To our knowledge none of them, nor Zoutendijk's theorem in this form, has a machine-checked proof. The mission produces checked statements of the theorem, its two lemmas and its main application, and a reusable formal vocabulary for line-search methods (level sets, Wolfe steps, Zoutendijk and sufficient descent conditions).

Difficulty

The usual route to convergence of a descent method bounds cos⁡θk\cos\theta_kcosθk​ away from zero, or shows that ∥dk∥2\|d_k\|^2∥dk​∥2 grows at most linearly, and combines this with the Zoutendijk condition. For Polak–Ribière-type methods neither bound is available a priori: βk\beta_kβk​ can be as large as bbb on many consecutive iterations, so ∥dk∥\|d_k\|∥dk​∥ can grow geometrically along stretches of the run. The argument must instead control the proportion of large steps over blocks of iterations and relate it to the change of direction, and reconcile both with the boundedness of L\mathcal LL. The combinatorics of blocks (floor and ceiling of Δ\DeltaΔ, products of βk2\beta_k^2βk2​ grouped by blocks) and the interplay between Lemma 4.1 and Lemma 4.2 carry most of the formal work. Corollary 4.4 additionally needs Zoutendijk's theorem for Wolfe line searches, which is not assumed here.

Formalization scope

  • The space is any finite-dimensional real inner product space EEE; the gradient is gradient f for its inner product, matching "the scalar product used to compute the gradient" (p. 2).
  • Every statement assumes fff globally C1C^1C1 (the paper's "fff is smooth", (1.1)) in addition to Assumptions 2.1, whose Lipschitz condition is kept local to an open neighbourhood N\mathcal NN of L\mathcal LL.
  • Sequences are indexed from 111 as in the paper; index 000 is unused. Steplengths are positive. βk\beta_kβk​ is a free sequence constrained only by hypotheses.
  • The standing assumption of §4, gk≠0g_k\ne0gk​=0 for all kkk (p. 11), is a hypothesis of Theorem 4.3 and Corollary 4.4. Lemmas 4.1 and 4.2 assume (4.3), which implies it.
  • Lemma 4.1 assumes βk≥0\beta_k\ge0βk​≥0 but not (4.4) or Property (*); Lemma 4.2 assumes Property (*) and (4.4) but no sign of βk\beta_kβk​, exactly as on the page.
  • The Zoutendijk sum is written ∑k≥1⟨gk,dk⟩2/∥dk∥2\sum_{k\ge1}\langle g_k,d_k\rangle^2/\|d_k\|^2∑k≥1​⟨gk​,dk​⟩2/∥dk​∥2, equal to ∑cos⁡2θk∥gk∥2\sum\cos^2\theta_k\|g_k\|^2∑cos2θk​∥gk​∥2 wherever the latter is defined. lim inf⁡∥gk∥=0\liminf\|g_k\|=0liminf∥gk​∥=0 is stated as "for every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 and KKK, some k≥Kk\ge Kk≥K has ∥gk∥<ε\|g_k\|<\varepsilon∥gk​∥<ε".
  • Property (*) quantifies over every pair (γ,γˉ)(\gamma,\bar\gamma)(γ,γˉ​) satisfying (4.10), and b,λb,\lambdab,λ may depend on them; it holds vacuously for runs that violate (4.10), as in the paper.
  • The statement that Polak–Ribière has Property (*) assumes the iterates stay in L\mathcal LL, so that the Lipschitz bound applies to them, which the paper's argument uses implicitly.
  • Lemmas 4.1 and 4.2 are steps of a proof by contradiction: their hypotheses are expected to be unsatisfiable on actual runs. A local check confirms that the hypotheses of Theorem 4.3 are jointly satisfiable (f(x)=x2/2f(x)=x^2/2f(x)=x2/2 on R\mathbb RR, βk=0\beta_k=0βk​=0, αk=0.9\alpha_k=0.9αk​=0.9), so the goal is not vacuous. A formalization in which Property (*) loses (4.12), or one that replaces the abstract line search properties by a specific line search, would prove a different theorem and is ruled out.

Needed infrastructure: summability arguments for the series (4.5) and ∑1/∥dk∥2\sum1/\|d_k\|^2∑1/∥dk​∥2, Cauchy–Schwarz in EEE, finite counting over index blocks, and, for Corollary 4.4, Zoutendijk's theorem (Theorem 2.1 of the report, a target of the companion mission). Contributions of general line-search lemmas are welcome and reusable well beyond this paper.

Selected references

  • J. C. Gilbert and J. Nocedal, Global convergence properties of conjugate gradient methods for optimization, INRIA Rapport de Recherche 1268, 1990, HAL inria-00075291; journal version SIAM J. Optim. 2(1) (1992) 21–42, doi:10.1137/0802003.
  • M. Al-Baali, Descent property and global convergence of the Fletcher–Reeves method with inexact line search, IMA J. Numer. Anal. 5 (1985) 121–124, doi:10.1093/imanum/5.1.121.
  • M. J. D. Powell, Nonconvex minimization calculations and the conjugate gradient method, Lecture Notes in Math. 1066, Springer, 1984, 122–141, doi:10.1007/BFb0099521.
  • M. J. D. Powell, Convergence properties of algorithms for nonlinear optimization, Report DAMTP 1985/NA1, University of Cambridge, 1985; SIAM Review 28 (1986) 487–500, doi:10.1137/1028154.
  • E. Polak and G. Ribière, Note sur la convergence de méthodes de directions conjuguées, Rev. Française Informat. Recherche Opérationnelle 3 (1969) 35–43, numdam.
  • R. Fletcher and C. M. Reeves, Function minimization by conjugate gradients, Computer J. 7 (1964) 149–154, doi:10.1093/comjnl/7.2.149.
5 thms1 active userReviewed
Numerical AnalysisOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Globally Convergent Inexact Newton Methods II: Trust Region Limit Points Are Stationary Points of ‖F‖, and Near a Zero Where F′ Is Invertible the Full Newton Step Is Eventually TakenResearch Paper

Motivation

Solving a system of nonlinear equations F(x)=0F(x)=0F(x)=0, with F:Rn→RnF:\mathbf R^n\to\mathbf R^nF:Rn→Rn continuously differentiable, is a basic task in numerical analysis and optimization: it is the inner step of interior-point and sequential quadratic programming methods, of implicit time-stepping for differential equations, and of equilibrium computations in operations research. Newton's method converges fast near a solution at which the derivative F′F'F′ is invertible, but from a poor starting point it may fail. Trust region methods are a standard globalization: each step minimizes the norm of the local linear model F(xk)+F′(xk)sF(x_k)+F'(x_k)sF(xk​)+F′(xk​)s over a ball ∥s∥≤δk\|s\|\le\delta_k∥s∥≤δk​, and the radius δk\delta_kδk​ is shrunk or enlarged according to how well the model predicted the actual decrease of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥ (Moré and Sorensen 1983; Dennis and Schnabel 1983, §6.4).

Eisenstat and Walker (1994) developed a general global convergence theory for inexact Newton methods, in which steps only reduce the linear model's norm by a factor ηk<1\eta_k<1ηk​<1 and must also give sufficient decrease of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥. Their §4, Application 1, shows that this theory also covers trust region methods. This mission formalizes that application.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional real vector space with an arbitrary norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ (the paper's Rn\mathbf R^nRn; the norm need not be Euclidean), and F:E→EF:E\to EF:E→E continuously differentiable with derivative F′(x)F'(x)F′(x). For a point xkx_kxk​ and a step sss, the actual reduction and predicted reduction are

ared⁡k(s)=∥F(xk)∥−∥F(xk+s)∥,pred⁡k(s)=∥F(xk)∥−∥F(xk)+F′(xk)s∥.\operatorname{ared}_k(s)=\|F(x_k)\|-\|F(x_k+s)\|,\qquad \operatorname{pred}_k(s)=\|F(x_k)\|-\|F(x_k)+F'(x_k)s\|.aredk​(s)=∥F(xk​)∥−∥F(xk​+s)∥,predk​(s)=∥F(xk​)∥−∥F(xk​)+F′(xk​)s∥.

A point xxx is a stationary point of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥ if ∥F(x)∥≤∥F(x)+F′(x)s∥\|F(x)\|\le\|F(x)+F'(x)s\|∥F(x)∥≤∥F(x)+F′(x)s∥ for every sss: no step decreases the norm of the linear model. A point x∗x_*x∗​ is a limit point of (xk)(x_k)(xk​) if every ball around x∗x_*x∗​ contains xkx_kxk​ for infinitely many kkk.

Algorithm TR is given x0x_0x0​, δˉ0>0\bar\delta_0>0δˉ0​>0, 0<t≤u<10<t\le u<10<t≤u<1 and 0<θmin⁡<θmax⁡<10<\theta_{\min}<\theta_{\max}<10<θmin​<θmax​<1. At iteration kkk it sets δk=δˉk\delta_k=\bar\delta_kδk​=δˉk​ and picks a step

sk∈arg⁡min⁡∥s∥≤δk∥F(xk)+F′(xk)s∥.(4.5)s_k\in\arg\min_{\|s\|\le\delta_k}\|F(x_k)+F'(x_k)s\|.\tag{4.5}sk​∈arg∥s∥≤δk​min​∥F(xk​)+F′(xk​)s∥.(4.5)

While ared⁡k(sk)<t⋅pred⁡k(sk)\operatorname{ared}_k(s_k)<t\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)aredk​(sk​)<t⋅predk​(sk​), it replaces δk\delta_kδk​ by θδk\theta\delta_kθδk​ for some θ∈[θmin⁡,θmax⁡]\theta\in[\theta_{\min},\theta_{\max}]θ∈[θmin​,θmax​] and picks a new sks_ksk​ by (4.5). Then xk+1=xk+skx_{k+1}=x_k+s_kxk+1​=xk​+sk​, and the next initial radius satisfies δˉk+1≥δk\bar\delta_{k+1}\ge\delta_kδˉk+1​≥δk​ if ared⁡k(sk)≥u⋅pred⁡k(sk)\operatorname{ared}_k(s_k)\ge u\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)aredk​(sk​)≥u⋅predk​(sk​), and δˉk+1≥θmin⁡δk\bar\delta_{k+1}\ge\theta_{\min}\delta_kδˉk+1​≥θmin​δk​ otherwise. The algorithm does not break down if it generates an infinite sequence of iterates.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 4.4

If Algorithm TR does not break down, then

every limit point x∗ of (xk) is a stationary point of ∥F∥,\text{every limit point } x_* \text{ of } (x_k) \text{ is a stationary point of } \|F\|,every limit point x∗​ of (xk​) is a stationary point of ∥F∥,

and if x∗x_*x∗​ is a limit point with F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) invertible, then

F(x∗)=0,xk→x∗,sk=−F′(xk)−1F(xk) for all sufficiently large k.F(x_*)=0,\qquad x_k\to x_*,\qquad s_k=-F'(x_k)^{-1}F(x_k)\ \text{for all sufficiently large }k.F(x∗​)=0,xk​→x∗​,sk​=−F′(xk​)−1F(xk​) for all sufficiently large k.

The statement has no constants, and it holds for every choice the algorithm leaves open: the minimizer in (4.5), the factors θ\thetaθ, and the new radii.

Milestones

  1. Corollary 3.7. Any sequence with pred⁡k(sk)≥0\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)\ge0predk​(sk​)≥0 and ared⁡k(sk)≥t⋅pred⁡k(sk)\operatorname{ared}_k(s_k)\ge t\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)aredk​(sk​)≥t⋅predk​(sk​), sk=xk+1−xks_k=x_{k+1}-x_ksk​=xk+1​−xk​, for which ∥sk∥≤Γ⋅pred⁡k(sk)\|s_k\|\le\Gamma\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)∥sk​∥≤Γ⋅predk​(sk​) near a limit point x∗x_*x∗​, converges to x∗x_*x∗​.
  2. Lemma 4.2. If F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) is invertible, then for some Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0, ϵ∗>0\epsilon_*>0ϵ∗​>0, every minimizer sss of (4.5) with any radius δ>0\delta>0δ>0 and ∥x−x∗∥<ϵ∗\|x-x_*\|<\epsilon_*∥x−x∗​∥<ϵ∗​ satisfies ∥s∥≤Γ{∥F(x)∥−∥F(x)+F′(x)s∥}\|s\|\le\Gamma\{\|F(x)\|-\|F(x)+F'(x)s\|\}∥s∥≤Γ{∥F(x)∥−∥F(x)+F′(x)s∥} (4.6).
  3. Lemma 4.3. If x∗x_*x∗​ is not a stationary point of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥, then (4.6) holds for radii 0<δ≤δ∗0<\delta\le\delta_*0<δ≤δ∗​ and xxx near x∗x_*x∗​.
  4. Lemma 4.1. For a run of Algorithm TR, if ∥sk∥≤Γ⋅pred⁡k(sk)\|s_k\|\le\Gamma\cdot\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)∥sk​∥≤Γ⋅predk​(sk​) (4.1) holds for every trial step of iterations with xkx_kxk​ near a limit point x∗x_*x∗​ and kkk large, then xk→x∗x_k\to x_*xk​→x∗​ and lim inf⁡kδk>0\liminf_k\delta_k>0liminfk​δk​>0.

An extra item, Corollary 3.6, states that such a sequence with ∑krelpred⁡k(sk)\sum_k\operatorname{relpred}_k(s_k)∑k​relpredk​(sk​) divergent has F(xk)→0F(x_k)\to0F(xk​)→0, where relpred⁡k(sk)=pred⁡k(sk)/∥F(xk)∥\operatorname{relpred}_k(s_k)=\operatorname{pred}_k(s_k)/\|F(x_k)\|relpredk​(sk​)=predk​(sk​)/∥F(xk​)∥ (or 111 if F(xk)=0F(x_k)=0F(xk​)=0).

Significance

Theorem 4.4 is a global convergence result that assumes neither bounded level sets, nor the existence of a solution, nor an inner-product norm. It separates two conclusions: without any regularity, the only possible accumulation points are stationary points of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥; at an accumulation point where F′F'F′ is invertible, the method finds a solution, converges to it, and eventually takes the full Newton step. The paper assumes only continuous differentiability, which does not by itself give a quadratic convergence rate. Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3 are local facts about minimizers of the linear model's norm over a ball and apply to any method that uses such steps.

The result is proved in the paper. As far as we know, none of it is formalized: Mathlib has the Fréchet derivative, the inverse function theorem and invertible continuous linear maps, but no trust region or inexact Newton convergence theory. This mission produces machine-checked versions of the paper's statements for an arbitrary norm, together with a reusable vocabulary (actual/predicted reduction, stationary points of ∥F∥\|F\|∥F∥, model minimizers, trust region runs) for later formalizations of trust region and Levenberg–Marquardt type methods.

Difficulty

The obvious argument shows that ∥F(xk)∥\|F(x_k)\|∥F(xk​)∥ decreases, so it converges, and then tries to conclude that the predicted reductions tend to zero. That step fails without control on the radii: if δk→0\delta_k\to0δk​→0, small predicted reductions say nothing about stationarity, and the steps could shrink while the iterates still wander. The central difficulty is to show that near a non-stationary or regular limit point the radii stay bounded away from zero, while at the same time proving that the whole sequence converges to that limit point, not just a subsequence. Under an arbitrary norm the model minimizer is not unique and the model norm is not smooth, so arguments based on gradients of 12∥F∥22\frac12\|F\|_2^221​∥F∥22​ do not apply.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbf R^nRn with an arbitrary norm is a finite-dimensional real normed space E; F′F'F′ is fderiv ℝ F, and "continuously differentiable" is ContDiff ℝ 1 F.
  • A run of Algorithm TR is the predicate IsTRRun. Iteration kkk records the number mkm_kmk​ of while-loop passes, the factors θk,j∈[θmin⁡,θmax⁡]\theta_{k,j}\in[\theta_{\min},\theta_{\max}]θk,j​∈[θmin​,θmax​], and trial steps sk,0,…,sk,mks_{k,0},\dots,s_{k,m_k}sk,0​,…,sk,mk​​, each a minimizer of (4.5) for its radius. Trials j<mkj<m_kj<mk​ fail the test ared⁡≥t⋅pred⁡\operatorname{ared}\ge t\cdot\operatorname{pred}ared≥t⋅pred, and trial mkm_kmk​ passes it. "Does not break down" is the existence of such a run. Any minimizer in (4.5) may be chosen.
  • "Limit point" is MapClusterPt. "Sufficiently near x∗x_*x∗​ and kkk sufficiently large" is: there exist ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0 and KKK such that the property holds for k≥Kk\ge Kk≥K with ∥xk−x∗∥<ρ\|x_k-x_*\|<\rho∥xk​−x∗​∥<ρ. "Whenever kkk is sufficiently large" is ∀ᶠ k in atTop.
  • "F′(x∗)F'(x_*)F′(x∗​) invertible" is (fderiv ℝ F xstar).IsInvertible. F′(xk)−1F'(x_k)^{-1}F′(xk​)−1 is ContinuousLinearMap.inverse, which is the true inverse for all large kkk.
  • "lim inf⁡δk>0\liminf\delta_k>0liminfδk​>0" is "eventually δk≥c\delta_k\ge cδk​≥c for some c>0c>0c>0"; "∑relpred⁡\sum\operatorname{relpred}∑relpred divergent" is ¬ Summable.
  • In Lemma 4.1, (4.1) is required for every trial step sk,js_{k,j}sk,j​ of iterations with xkx_kxk​ near x∗x_*x∗​ and kkk large: in Algorithm TR the symbol sks_ksk​ takes the value of each trial step, and the proof on p. 403 applies (4.1) to trial steps. Requiring it for the accepted step alone would make the lemma false. Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3 are stated with Γ>0\Gamma>0Γ>0.
  • No statement assumes F(x∗)=0F(x_*)=0F(x∗​)=0, xk→x∗x_k\to x_*xk​→x∗​, bounded level sets, a Euclidean norm or a Lipschitz derivative: those are conclusions or absent from the paper. A run predicate that forced zero steps or zero radii would make the convergence claims trivial; IsTRRun forces neither, and it has a run with nonzero steps (for F=idF=\mathrm{id}F=id on R\mathbf RR).

Needed infrastructure: the continuity of x↦F′(x)−1x\mapsto F'(x)^{-1}x↦F′(x)−1 near an invertible point (Lemma 1.1 of the paper), a uniform linearization bound ∥F(y)−F(x)−F′(x)(y−x)∥≤ε∥y−x∥\|F(y)-F(x)-F'(x)(y-x)\|\le\varepsilon\|y-x\|∥F(y)−F(x)−F′(x)(y−x)∥≤ε∥y−x∥ near a point (Lemma 1.2), and the telescoping argument of Theorem 3.5. These are reusable well beyond this mission. Contributions are welcome on each milestone separately, and on general lemmas about minimizers of ∥a+Ls∥\|a+Ls\|∥a+Ls∥ over a ball.

Selected references

  • S. C. Eisenstat and H. F. Walker, Globally Convergent Inexact Newton Methods, SIAM Journal on Optimization 4(2) (1994) 393–422. https://doi.org/10.1137/0804022
  • J. J. Moré and D. C. Sorensen, Computing a Trust Region Step, SIAM Journal on Scientific and Statistical Computing 4(3) (1983) 553–572. https://doi.org/10.1137/0904038
  • J. E. Dennis Jr. and R. B. Schnabel, Numerical Methods for Unconstrained Optimization and Nonlinear Equations, Prentice-Hall 1983; SIAM reprint 1996. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971200
  • R. S. Dembo, S. C. Eisenstat and T. Steihaug, Inexact Newton Methods, SIAM Journal on Numerical Analysis 19(2) (1982) 400–408. https://doi.org/10.1137/0719025
7 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryDynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Instabilities and Stabilization Methods in Distributed Real-Time Scheduling of Manufacturing Systems 4: A Run-Truncating Priority-Queue Supervisor Keeps Every Buffer Bounded When ρₘ < 1Research Paper

Motivation

A flexible manufacturing system routes several part types through a set of machines; a machine that switches from one kind of part to another must spend a set-up time first. Each machine has to decide, in real time and from local information only, which of its waiting buffers to work on and for how long. Long runs waste little time on set-ups but starve other buffers; short runs do the opposite.

Kumar and Seidman (IEEE TAC 35(3), 1990) showed in §III of the paper that natural distributed rules (clearing policies, which keep processing a buffer until it is empty) can be unstable when parts revisit machines, even though every machine has enough capacity. Their §IV gives a sufficient condition for a subclass of such rules to be stable, which is stricter than the capacity condition. §V, the subject of this mission, asks for something stronger: a simple, distributed mechanism that a supervisor can add to any scheduling policy and that makes the system stable whenever the capacity condition alone holds.

Timeline. Perkins and Kumar (1989) proved that the capacity condition is sufficient for the existence of some stabilizing policy, and that every clear-a-fraction policy is stable on acyclic systems. Kumar and Seidman (1990) gave the instability examples for nonacyclic systems and the universal supervisor formalized here.

Setting

There are PPP part types and MMM machines. Part type ppp arrives at rate dp>0d_p>0dp​>0 and follows a route of npn_pnp​ operations; operation iii is done by machine μp,i\mu_{p,i}μp,i​ and takes τp,i>0\tau_{p,i}>0τp,i​>0 per part. Parts awaiting operation iii wait in buffer bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​, with level xp,i(t)≥0x_{p,i}(t)\ge 0xp,i​(t)≥0. Machine mmm serves Bm={bp,i:μp,i=m}B_m=\{b_{p,i}:\mu_{p,i}=m\}Bm​={bp,i​:μp,i​=m}, and switching from bbb to b′b'b′ costs δb,b′≥0\delta_{b,b'}\ge 0δb,b′​≥0. Flows are continuous: a machine processing a nonempty buffer bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​ drains it at rate 1/τp,i1/\tau_{p,i}1/τp,i​, the output feeds bp,i+1b_{p,i+1}bp,i+1​ instantly, and a machine on an empty buffer passes its inflow through. Each machine works in runs: a set-up, then a processing phase on one buffer.

The load of machine mmm and the capacity condition are

ρm:=∑(p,i): μp,i=mdpτp,i<1(1≤m≤M).(1)\rho_m:=\sum_{(p,i):\,\mu_{p,i}=m}d_p\tau_{p,i}<1\qquad(1\le m\le M). \tag{1}ρm​:=(p,i):μp,i​=m∑​dp​τp,i​<1(1≤m≤M).(1)

The system is stable if sup⁡0≤t<∞xp,i(t)<∞\sup_{0\le t<\infty}x_{p,i}(t)<\inftysup0≤t<∞​xp,i​(t)<∞ for every buffer.

The supervisor picks γm\gamma_mγm​ with

γm(1−ρm)>∑b∈Bmmax⁡b′∈Bmδb′,b(24)\gamma_m(1-\rho_m)>\sum_{b\in B_m}\max_{b'\in B_m}\delta_{b',b} \tag{24}γm​(1−ρm​)>b∈Bm​∑​b′∈Bm​max​δb′,b​(24)

and thresholds zp,i≥0z_{p,i}\ge0zp,i​≥0. It truncates every processing run of bp,ib_{p,i}bp,i​ at γmdpτp,i\gamma_m d_p\tau_{p,i}γm​dp​τp,i​; it keeps a first-come first-served queue QmQ_mQm​ of the buffers that are not being processed and whose level exceeds zp,iz_{p,i}zp,i​; when a run ends and Qm≠∅Q_m\ne\emptysetQm​=∅, the head of QmQ_mQm​ is processed next, for exactly γmdpτp,i\gamma_m d_p\tau_{p,i}γm​dp​τp,i​ unless it clears earlier. When QmQ_mQm​ is empty the underlying policy is free. Write ζm:=γm(1−ρm)−∑b∈Bmmax⁡b′∈Bmδb′,b>0\zeta_m:=\gamma_m(1-\rho_m)-\sum_{b\in B_m}\max_{b'\in B_m}\delta_{b',b}>0ζm​:=γm​(1−ρm​)−∑b∈Bm​​maxb′∈Bm​​δb′,b​>0 (26) and βp,i(t):=∑j≤iτp,ixp,j(t)\beta_{p,i}(t):=\sum_{j\le i}\tau_{p,i}x_{p,j}(t)βp,i​(t):=∑j≤i​τp,i​xp,j​(t), the backlog of part type ppp for machine μp,i\mu_{p,i}μp,i​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2

Under (1), (24) and z≥0z\ge 0z≥0, every supervised trajectory, from every initial state, satisfies

sup⁡0≤t<∞xp,i(t)<+∞for all p,i.\sup_{0\le t<\infty}x_{p,i}(t)<+\infty\qquad\text{for all }p,i.0≤t<∞sup​xp,i​(t)<+∞for all p,i.

The bound is allowed to depend on the trajectory; no uniformity in the initial state is claimed.

Milestones: Lemma 1

  1. A buffer that enters QmQ_mQm​ at tint_{\rm in}tin​ completes its next run by tin+γm−ζmt_{\rm in}+\gamma_m-\zeta_mtin​+γm​−ζm​ (25).
  2. If it enters QmQ_mQm​ with xp,i(tin)≥γmdpx_{p,i}(t_{\rm in})\ge\gamma_m d_pxp,i​(tin​)≥γm​dp​, that run lowers the backlog: βp,i(tcomplete)≤βp,i(tin)−ζmdpτp,i\beta_{p,i}(t_{\rm complete})\le\beta_{p,i}(t_{\rm in})-\zeta_m d_p\tau_{p,i}βp,i​(tcomplete​)≤βp,i​(tin​)−ζm​dp​τp,i​.
  3. A buffer that enters QmQ_mQm​ at tint_{\rm in}tin​ and stays above max⁡(γmdp,zp,i)\max(\gamma_md_p,z_{p,i})max(γm​dp​,zp,i​) (strictly above zp,iz_{p,i}zp,i​ after tint_{\rm in}tin​) up to t′t't′ has t′−tin≤(1+βp,i(tin)/(ζmdpτp,i))(γm−ζm)t'-t_{\rm in}\le(1+\beta_{p,i}(t_{\rm in})/(\zeta_md_p\tau_{p,i}))(\gamma_m-\zeta_m)t′−tin​≤(1+βp,i​(tin​)/(ζm​dp​τp,i​))(γm​−ζm​).
  4. Any interval on which xp,i≥gp,i:=max⁡(γmdp,zp,i)+γmdpx_{p,i}\ge g_{p,i}:=\max(\gamma_md_p,z_{p,i})+\gamma_md_pxp,i​≥gp,i​:=max(γm​dp​,zp,i​)+γm​dp​ has length at most ap,i+cp,iβp,i(t)a_{p,i}+c_{p,i}\beta_{p,i}(t)ap,i​+cp,i​βp,i​(t).

Significance

The theorem separates two concerns of real-time scheduling. The underlying policy can be tuned for performance (low set-up overhead, short buffers) without any stability analysis; the supervisor guarantees stability under exactly the condition that is necessary for it. The mechanism is distributed: each machine uses only its own buffer levels. With z=0z=0z=0 it enforces FCFS with truncated runs; with large zzz and γ\gammaγ it never intervenes on a policy that is already stable, so the degree of intervention is tunable. Combined with the §III instability examples, it shows that instability of clearing policies is a design defect that a local safeguard removes.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. This mission produces a formal model of continuous-flow manufacturing systems with set-up times and runs, a formal definition of the supervisor, and the four parts of Lemma 1 as reusable statements about it. Part 3) is stated with a corrected hypothesis (see Formalization scope).

Difficulty

The underlying policy is arbitrary, so no structure of the trajectory between interventions can be used: the policy may idle on empty buffers, switch at will, and re-select a buffer as soon as its run is truncated. The natural approach of bounding the total work at a machine fails, because work arrives at machine mmm from upstream machines whose behaviour depends on mmm itself through re-entrant routes, so a machine-by-machine argument is circular. A further difficulty is that the supervisor acts only on buffers above their thresholds, so a buffer can be ignored for as long as it sits at or below zp,iz_{p,i}zp,i​; any bound has to account for the time spent below the threshold and for repeated re-entries into QmQ_mQm​, with a set-up paid at each.

Formalization scope

  • Model. Part types Fin P, machines Fin M, buffers Σ p, Fin (n p); paper index iii is Lean index i−1i-1i−1. Time is real with t≥0t\ge0t≥0. Set-up times satisfy δb,b=0\delta_{b,b}=0δb,b​=0: a set-up is paid only on a switch. No transport delays or assembly, as in the paper.
  • Runs. Each machine is always in a run (no idling outside runs); a run is never cut during its set-up; run starts do not accumulate; zero-length runs are allowed. Processing is at rate at most 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ and only in a processing phase of bbb, and at exactly 1/τb1/\tau_b1/τb​ while bbb is nonempty.
  • Queue. Membership of QmQ_mQm​ is determined by the trajectory: not on the current run and level strictly above zbz_bzb​. The FCFS key is the start of the current sojourn; ties, including the initial queue at time 000, are broken arbitrarily, so every initial queue order is covered. A buffer whose run just ended is in QmQ_mQm​ at that instant if its level exceeds zbz_bzb​.
  • Lemma 1. Parts 1)–3) assume, as the page does, that the buffer enters QmQ_mQm​ at tint_{\rm in}tin​. Part 3) adds xp,i>zp,ix_{p,i}>z_{p,i}xp,i​>zp,i​ on (tin,t′](t_{\rm in},t'](tin​,t′]: with the printed non-strict hypothesis the buffer can sit at exactly zp,iz_{p,i}zp,i​, never be re-queued, and wait arbitrarily long. In 4), cp,ic_{p,i}cp,i​ is (γm−ζm)/(ζmdpτp,i)(\gamma_m-\zeta_m)/(\zeta_md_p\tau_{p,i})(γm​−ζm​)/(ζm​dp​τp,i​).
  • Ruled out. The base policy is not restricted to clearing, CAF or any fixed rule, the system is not restricted to few machines or acyclic routes, and the hypothesis of the goal is (24), not ζm>0\zeta_m>0ζm​>0. A non-vacuity witness (one machine, one buffer) shows the class of supervised trajectories is nonempty.
  • Reusable. The trajectory model (runs, set-ups, processing law) is the same as in the other missions of this series and applies to any distributed scheduling policy with set-ups.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the Lemma 1 parts, and lemmas on the model (Lipschitz continuity of levels, monotonicity of a buffer's level while it is not processed).

Selected references

  • P. R. Kumar and T. I. Seidman, Dynamic instabilities and stabilization methods in distributed real-time scheduling of manufacturing systems, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 35(3), 289–298, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.50339
  • J. R. Perkins and P. R. Kumar, Stable, distributed, real-time scheduling of flexible manufacturing/assembly/disassembly systems, IEEE Trans. Automat. Control 34(2), 139–148, 1989. https://doi.org/10.1109/9.21085
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Dynamic Pricing and Inventory Control of Substitute Products 3: Optimal Dynamic Prices When the Other Variates Keep Fixed PricesResearch Paper

Motivation

A retailer that sells a line of substitutable products — sizes, colours or models of one item — over a short season without replenishment must decide how to price each variate as inventory runs down. Customers substitute: when one variate is expensive or sold out, part of its demand moves to the others. Dong, Kouvelis and Tian (M&SOM 2009) model this with a multinomial logit (MNL) choice model inside a finite-horizon dynamic program and characterize the optimal prices in closed form up to one scalar equation per period.

Retailers often cannot reprice everything. A common arrangement, described in §5.1.3 of the paper, is mixed pricing: products advertised in a printed catalogue keep their catalogue prices for the season, while products sold only online are repriced dynamically. Proposition 2 of the paper gives the optimal dynamic prices in this setting. It is the third of the paper's three optimal-pricing results, after the full dynamic pricing model (Theorem 1) and unified dynamic pricing with one common price (Proposition 1); each is the subject of its own mission in this series.

Setting

There are nnn variates n={1,…,n}\mathfrak n = \{1,\dots,n\}n={1,…,n} and ttt remaining periods; time counts down. In each period one customer arrives with probability λ∈(0,1]\lambda \in (0,1]λ∈(0,1]. Variate iii has a quality index aia_iai​; the no-purchase option has utility u0u_0u0​; μ>0\mu > 0μ>0 is the MNL scale. The inventory is x∈Nnx \in \mathbb N^nx∈Nn, and the in-stock set is S(x)={i:xi>0}S(x) = \{i : x^i > 0\}S(x)={i:xi>0}. A sold-out variate leaves the choice set.

The variates are split into a dynamic-pricing set n1\mathfrak n_1n1​ and a fixed-pricing set n2=n∖n1\mathfrak n_2 = \mathfrak n \setminus \mathfrak n_1n2​=n∖n1​, where j∈n2j \in \mathfrak n_2j∈n2​ is always sold at its fixed price rj≥0r^j \ge 0rj≥0. Write S1(x)=S(x)∩n1S_1(x) = S(x)\cap\mathfrak n_1S1​(x)=S(x)∩n1​ and S2(x)=S(x)∩n2S_2(x) = S(x)\cap\mathfrak n_2S2​(x)=S(x)∩n2​. Given dynamic prices rir^iri (i∈n1i \in \mathfrak n_1i∈n1​), an arriving customer buys an in-stock variate iii with probability

Pi=e(ai−ri)/μ∑j∈S(x)e(aj−rj)/μ+eu0/μ,P^i = \frac{e^{(a_i - r^i)/\mu}}{\sum_{j\in S(x)} e^{(a_j - r^j)/\mu} + e^{u_0/\mu}},Pi=∑j∈S(x)​e(aj​−rj)/μ+eu0​/μe(ai​−ri)/μ​,

and buys nothing with probability P0P^0P0 (numerator eu0/μe^{u_0/\mu}eu0​/μ). The value function πt(x)\pi_t(x)πt​(x) is the maximum expected revenue from ttt periods with inventory xxx: π0≡0\pi_0 \equiv 0π0​≡0 and

πt(x)=max⁡r∈R+n1{λ∑i∈S(x)riPi+λ∑i∈S(x)Pi πt−1(x−ei)+(λP0+1−λ) πt−1(x)}.\pi_t(x) = \max_{r \in \mathbb R^{n_1}_+}\Big\{\lambda\sum_{i\in S(x)} r^i P^i + \lambda\sum_{i\in S(x)} P^i\,\pi_{t-1}(x-e^i) + (\lambda P^0 + 1-\lambda)\,\pi_{t-1}(x)\Big\}.πt​(x)=r∈R+n1​​max​{λi∈S(x)∑​riPi+λi∈S(x)∑​Piπt−1​(x−ei)+(λP0+1−λ)πt−1​(x)}.

The marginal value of a unit of variate iii is Δiπt(x)=πt(x)−πt(x−ei)\Delta^i\pi_t(x) = \pi_t(x) - \pi_t(x-e^i)Δiπt​(x)=πt​(x)−πt​(x−ei). For a fixed-price variate put vj=rj−Δjπt−1(x)v_j = r^j - \Delta^j\pi_{t-1}(x)vj​=rj−Δjπt−1​(x) and uj=aj−rju_j = a_j - r^juj​=aj​−rj; for the outside option v0=0v_0 = 0v0​=0, and S2+(x)=S2(x)∪{0}S_2^+(x) = S_2(x)\cup\{0\}S2+​(x)=S2​(x)∪{0}.

In Lean the model lives in SubstitutePricing.Mixed.Model: S1, S2, P, P0, objM, piM, deltaM, v, uf, lhs15, rhs15, rstarM.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 2

For every t≥1t \ge 1t≥1 and inventory xxx, the margin equation

∑j∈S2+(x)(mt−vjμ−1)e(mt+uj)/μ=∑i∈S1(x)e(ai−Δiπt−1(x))/μ(15)\sum_{j\in S_2^+(x)}\Big(\frac{m_t - v_j}{\mu} - 1\Big)e^{(m_t+u_j)/\mu} = \sum_{i\in S_1(x)} e^{(a_i - \Delta^i\pi_{t-1}(x))/\mu} \tag{15}j∈S2+​(x)∑​(μmt​−vj​​−1)e(mt​+uj​)/μ=i∈S1​(x)∑​e(ai​−Δiπt−1​(x))/μ(15)

has exactly one solution mt(x)m_t(x)mt​(x); the dynamic prices

rti∗(x)=Δiπt−1(x)+mt(x),i∈S1(x),r^{i*}_t(x) = \Delta^i\pi_{t-1}(x) + m_t(x), \qquad i \in S_1(x),rti∗​(x)=Δiπt−1​(x)+mt​(x),i∈S1​(x),

are allowable and attain the maximum in the optimality equation; and

πt(x)=λ∑s=1t[ms(x)−μ].\pi_t(x) = \lambda\sum_{s=1}^t\big[m_s(x) - \mu\big].πt​(x)=λs=1∑t​[ms​(x)−μ].

Milestones

In the order the paper's proof uses them: the optimality equation rewritten as a price objective plus πt−1\pi_{t-1}πt−1​ (29); the no-purchase and fixed-price probabilities as functions of the dynamic ones (30); strict joint concavity of the objective (31) in the dynamic choice probabilities; the form (32)–(34) of an optimal price vector; the equivalence of (15) with (36) and uniqueness of its root; and the one-period recursion πt−πt−1=λ(mt−μ)\pi_t - \pi_{t-1} = \lambda(m_t - \mu)πt​−πt−1​=λ(mt​−μ).

Significance

The result says that, even with part of the line frozen at catalogue prices, the optimal dynamic prices keep the structure of the full model: every repriced variate earns the same margin mtm_tmt​ over its own marginal value, and one scalar equation per period determines that margin. The fixed-price variates enter (15) in exactly the role of the outside option, each weighted by its own net value vjv_jvj​; when n2=∅\mathfrak n_2 = \emptysetn2​=∅, (15) reduces to the margin equation (10) of Theorem 1. One difference from the full model is that the identity mtPt0∗=μm_t P^{0*}_t = \mumt​Pt0∗​=μ fails here, so the margin is not tied to the no-purchase probability alone. The structure reduces each period's n1n_1n1​-dimensional price optimization to a one-dimensional root and supports the paper's comparison of mixed, unified and full dynamic pricing in §5.

The paper gives a complete proof (Appendix A, pp. 337–338). None of it is formalized: Prove2Me and Mathlib have no MNL pricing dynamic program. The mission produces a machine-checked version of the proof, including the step the paper leaves unchecked (below).

Difficulty

The objective is not concave in prices, so a stationary point in price space is not automatically a maximum, and the obvious first-order argument proves nothing by itself. The fixed-price variates make the coupling worse than in the full model: their purchase probabilities move with every dynamic price, and the identity mtPt0∗=μm_t P^{0*}_t = \mumt​Pt0∗​=μ that pins the margin in Theorem 1 is lost.

The second difficulty is a gap. The price set is R+n1\mathbb R^{n_1}_+R+n1​​, and the proof never checks that the prices Δiπt−1(x)+mt\Delta^i\pi_{t-1}(x) + m_tΔiπt−1​(x)+mt​ are nonnegative. In Theorem 1 this follows from mt>μm_t > \mumt​>μ and Δiπt−1≥0\Delta^i\pi_{t-1}\ge 0Δiπt−1​≥0. Here the left side of (15) is negative for m≤μ+min⁡(0,min⁡jvj)m \le \mu + \min(0, \min_j v_j)m≤μ+min(0,minj​vj​), so mt>0m_t > 0mt​>0 follows once every vj≥−μv_j \ge -\muvj​≥−μ; the paper bounds vjv_jvj​ nowhere. Random search over small instances found no negative optimal price, so the goal is posed as printed. A complete formalization of the goal must close this gap.

Formalization scope

  • Variates are Fin n; the dynamic set is a Finset; inventories are Fin n → ℕ; time counts down with π0=0\pi_0 = 0π0​=0 defined by recursion on t : ℕ. Results are stated for t≥1t \ge 1t≥1.
  • The paper's null price ri=∞r^i = \inftyri=∞ for sold-out variates is modelled by removing them from the choice set, so in-stock prices are finite reals.
  • The no-sale term of (3) is counted once, as (5) and the proofs use it.
  • The value function is sSup over {r:ri≥0, i∈n1}\{r : r^i \ge 0,\ i\in\mathfrak n_1\}{r:ri≥0, i∈n1​}; coordinates outside n1\mathfrak n_1n1​ are ignored. Fixed prices are assumed nonnegative. The goal asserts feasibility of the prices, attainment of the maximum, and the value identity, so it never rests on the value of sSup at an unattained or unbounded set.
  • The root of (15) is quantified as "the unique mmm", not chosen inside a definition; the revenue formula takes the roots msm_sms​ for s=1,…,ts = 1,\dots,ts=1,…,t at the same inventory xxx, as the paper specifies.
  • The case S1(x)=∅S_1(x) = \emptysetS1​(x)=∅ is included: the right side of (15) is 000 and the root is μ+∑jθjvj/(1+Θ)\mu + \sum_j\theta_j v_j/(1+\Theta)μ+∑j​θj​vj​/(1+Θ).
  • The printed (36) has Δjπt\Delta^j\pi_tΔjπt​ where (32) and (37) have Δjπt−1\Delta^j\pi_{t-1}Δjπt−1​; the misprint is not copied.
  • Strict concavity (31) is stated on the open probability domain with the coordinates outside S1(x)S_1(x)S1​(x) pinned to 000.
  • The nonnegativity of the optimal prices is asserted as printed (see Difficulty).

A trivializing formalization — relaxing the price set to Rn1\mathbb R^{n_1}Rn1​, stating the value identity without attainment, or adding a hypothesis that bounds mtm_tmt​ from below — would remove the gap rather than prove the theorem, and is ruled out.

The development needs the MNL choice probabilities, the dynamic program, a strict-concavity argument on an open simplex, and a monotonicity-plus-intermediate-value root lemma. The model file is kept identical, up to the mixed-pricing data, to the files of the other two missions in this series so they can be consolidated. Proofs of any milestone, and in particular an argument closing the nonnegativity gap, are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. Dong, P. Kouvelis, Z. Tian, Dynamic Pricing and Inventory Control of Substitute Products, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 11(2) (2009) 317–339. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.1080.0221
  • G. Gallego, G. van Ryzin, A multiproduct dynamic pricing problem and its application to network yield management, Operations Research 45(1) (1997) 24–41. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.45.1.24
  • W. Hanson, K. Martin, Optimizing multinomial logit profit functions, Management Science 42(7) (1996) 992–1003. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.42.7.992
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Dynamic ProgrammingMarkov ChainReinforcement Learning·Captain: mikedeng1

Planning and Acting in Partially Observable Stochastic Domains: The Witness Theorem, a Set of Useful Policy Trees Is Incomplete iff Replacing One Subtree Improves on It at Some Belief StateResearch Paper

Motivation

A partially observable Markov decision process (POMDP) models an agent that acts in a stochastic world whose state it cannot see directly. The agent sees only noisy observations. POMDPs are the standard model for planning under uncertainty in robotics, dialogue systems, medical decision making and machine maintenance. The exact finite-horizon theory goes back to Smallwood and Sondik (1973), who showed that the optimal value function is piecewise linear and convex in the agent's belief, so that it can be represented by a finite set of vectors.

Kaelbling, Littman and Cassandra (1998) brought this theory to artificial intelligence. Their paper introduces policy trees as the objects behind those vectors and presents the witness algorithm, an exact value-iteration method. It is one of the most cited papers on POMDPs. The correctness of the witness algorithm rests on a single statement, Theorem A.1 of the paper's appendix, the witness theorem. This mission formalizes that theorem together with the lemmas its proof uses.

Timeline:

  • 1965: Åström reduces control with incomplete state information to control of the conditional state distribution.
  • 1973: Smallwood and Sondik prove that the finite-horizon value function is piecewise linear and convex and give the first exact algorithm.
  • 1980s: Cheng's linear support method. Lark and White's pruning.
  • 1994–1996: Littman, Cassandra and Kaelbling give the witness algorithm and its theorem (Littman's thesis, 1996).
  • 1998: the journal version studied here.

Setting

A POMDP is a tuple ⟨S,A,T,R,Ω,O⟩\langle S, A, T, R, \Omega, O\rangle⟨S,A,T,R,Ω,O⟩ with finite sets SSS of states, AAA of actions and Ω\OmegaΩ of observations. Taking action aaa in state sss leads to state s′s's′ with probability T(s,a,s′)T(s, a, s')T(s,a,s′) and earns expected reward R(s,a)R(s, a)R(s,a). The agent then observes ooo with probability O(s′,a,o)O(s', a, o)O(s′,a,o). Rewards are discounted by a factor γ\gammaγ with 0<γ≤10 < \gamma \le 10<γ≤1; γ=1\gamma = 1γ=1 is the plain finite-horizon problem.

A belief state bbb is a probability vector on SSS; BBB denotes the set of all of them. After action aaa and observation ooo, the belief is updated by Bayes' rule to SE(b,a,o)SE(b, a, o)SE(b,a,o). The normalizing constant of this update is Pr⁡(o∣a,b)\Pr(o \mid a, b)Pr(o∣a,b).

A ttt-step policy tree ppp is a single action when t=1t = 1t=1. For t≥2t \ge 2t≥2 it is a root action a(p)a(p)a(p) together with one (t−1)(t-1)(t−1)-step subtree o(p)o(p)o(p) for each observation ooo. Its value is defined by the recursion

Vp(s)=R(s,a(p))+γ∑s′T(s,a(p),s′)∑oO(s′,a(p),o) Vo(p)(s′),V_p(s) = R(s, a(p)) + \gamma \sum_{s'} T(s, a(p), s') \sum_{o} O(s', a(p), o)\, V_{o(p)}(s'),Vp​(s)=R(s,a(p))+γs′∑​T(s,a(p),s′)o∑​O(s′,a(p),o)Vo(p)​(s′),

and at a belief state it is Vp(b)=∑sb(s)Vp(s)=b⋅αpV_p(b) = \sum_s b(s) V_p(s) = b \cdot \alpha_pVp​(b)=∑s​b(s)Vp​(s)=b⋅αp​. The optimal ttt-step value is Vt(b)=max⁡pVp(b)V_t(b) = \max_p V_p(b)Vt​(b)=maxp​Vp​(b) over all ttt-step trees.

A tree ppp in a finite set V~\tilde VV~ is useful if some belief state gives it a strictly larger value than every tree of V~\tilde VV~ with a different value function. The useful trees form the parsimonious representation of V~\tilde VV~. Let Vt−1\mathcal V_{t-1}Vt−1​ be the useful (t−1)(t-1)(t−1)-step trees. The candidates CtaC^a_tCta​ are the ttt-step trees with root aaa and all subtrees in Vt−1\mathcal V_{t-1}Vt−1​, and Qta\mathcal Q^a_tQta​ is the set of trees useful in CtaC^a_tCta​. The Q-function is

Qta(b)=∑sb(s)R(s,a)+γ∑oPr⁡(o∣a,b) Vt−1(SE(b,a,o)).Q^a_t(b) = \sum_s b(s) R(s, a) + \gamma \sum_o \Pr(o \mid a, b)\, V_{t-1}(SE(b, a, o)).Qta​(b)=s∑​b(s)R(s,a)+γo∑​Pr(o∣a,b)Vt−1​(SE(b,a,o)).

For a set UaU_aUa​ of candidates, Q^ta(b)=max⁡p∈UaVp(b)\hat Q^a_t(b) = \max_{p \in U_a} V_p(b)Q^​ta​(b)=maxp∈Ua​​Vp​(b) is the current approximation. For p∈Uap \in U_ap∈Ua​, an observation ooo and p′∈Vt−1p' \in \mathcal V_{t-1}p′∈Vt−1​, the tree pnewp_{\mathrm{new}}pnew​ is ppp with its subtree for ooo replaced by p′p'p′.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem A.1

For a nonempty Ua⊆QtaU_a \subseteq \mathcal Q^a_tUa​⊆Qta​,

Ua≠Qta  ⟺  ∃ p∈Ua, o∗∈Ω, p′∈Vt−1, b∈B:Vpnew(b)>Vp~(b)  for all p~∈Ua.U_a \ne \mathcal Q^a_t \iff \exists\, p \in U_a,\ o^* \in \Omega,\ p' \in \mathcal V_{t-1},\ b \in B:\quad V_{p_{\mathrm{new}}}(b) > V_{\tilde p}(b) \ \text{ for all } \tilde p \in U_a .Ua​=Qta​⟺∃p∈Ua​, o∗∈Ω, p′∈Vt−1​, b∈B:Vpnew​​(b)>Vp~​​(b)  for all p~​∈Ua​.

Trees with the same value function are identified, as in the paper. The statement is exact, with no constants.

Milestones

  1. §3.3: Pr⁡(⋅∣a,b)\Pr(\cdot \mid a, b)Pr(⋅∣a,b) is a distribution and SE(b,a,o)∈BSE(b, a, o) \in BSE(b,a,o)∈B when Pr⁡(o∣a,b)≠0\Pr(o \mid a, b) \ne 0Pr(o∣a,b)=0.
  2. §4.1: VtV_tVt​ is convex on BBB.
  3. §4.2: the useful trees represent the same upper surface and are contained, up to identification, in every representing subset.
  4. §4.3: for every belief and subtree there is a useful subtree that is at least as good.
  5. §4.4: Qta(b)Q^a_t(b)Qta​(b) is the maximum of Vp(b)V_p(b)Vp​(b) over all aaa-rooted trees and over CtaC^a_tCta​, and Vt(b)=max⁡aQta(b)V_t(b) = \max_a Q^a_t(b)Vt​(b)=maxa​Qta​(b).
  6. §4.4.1: Q^ta≤Qta\hat Q^a_t \le Q^a_tQ^​ta​≤Qta​ on BBB.
  7. Appendix A: if Vp∗(b)>Vp(b)V_{p^*}(b) > V_p(b)Vp∗​(b)>Vp​(b) for trees with the same root, one subtree swap already improves on ppp at bbb.
  8. §4.4.2: the witness theorem in Q-function form: Q^ta≠Qta\hat Q^a_t \ne Q^a_tQ^​ta​=Qta​ somewhere on BBB iff a single-subtree replacement beats all of UaU_aUa​ at some belief.

Significance

The witness theorem is the stopping and growth criterion of the witness algorithm. If no single-subtree modification of the current trees beats all of them at some belief state, the current set represents the Q-function exactly. Otherwise the belief found is a witness and yields a new useful tree. Because each test is one linear program, the theorem turns an infinite search over belief space into finitely many linear programs. It is also the basis of the paper's complexity claim, polynomial time in ∣S∣|S|∣S∣, ∣A∣|A|∣A∣, ∣Ω∣|\Omega|∣Ω∣, ∣Vt−1∣|\mathcal V_{t-1}|∣Vt−1​∣ and ∣Qta∣|\mathcal Q^a_t|∣Qta​∣. Incremental pruning and later exact POMDP solvers rely on the same parsimonious-set machinery.

The theorem is proved in the paper; it has not been machine-checked. A formal development would also provide reusable infrastructure: policy trees, their value recursion, belief updates, and the existence and minimality of parsimonious representations of finite sets of linear functions on the simplex. That infrastructure is needed for any formal treatment of exact POMDP value iteration.

Difficulty

Most steps are finite algebra. The part that needs care is the "if" direction of the goal. A belief at which a new tree beats all of UaU_aUa​ shows that the true Q-function exceeds the approximation. It does not directly show that a useful tree is missing, because the maximizing tree at that belief may tie with other trees there. One needs the representation property of the parsimonious set (milestone 3): at every belief, the maximum over all candidates is attained by a useful one. Proving this means moving from a belief where several value functions tie to a nearby belief, inside the simplex, where exactly one of them is strictly largest. The proof on p. 131 also needs the Q-function to be attained on the candidate set, so that the improving subtree lies in Vt−1\mathcal V_{t-1}Vt−1​ (milestones 4 and 5).

Formalization scope

  • SSS, AAA and Ω\OmegaΩ are finite, nonempty types with decidable equality. TTT and OOO are stochastic and 0<γ≤10 < \gamma \le 10<γ≤1; these are bundled in POMDP.IsValid.
  • PolicyTree A Ω n is the type of (n+1)(n+1)(n+1)-step trees, so statements about ttt-step trees with subtrees use t=n+2t = n + 2t=n+2. The type is finite, and the set of all trees of a given depth is Finset.univ.
  • Values are defined by the recursion of p. 109, not by expectations over trajectories; everything is a finite sum.
  • Belief states are the points of stdSimplex ℝ S. Every "there is some belief state" ranges over the simplex, not over RS\mathbb R^SRS.
  • Usefulness is relative to a named finite set: all trees of a depth for Vt−1\mathcal V_{t-1}Vt−1​, and the candidates for Qta\mathcal Q^a_tQta​. Qta\mathcal Q^a_tQta​ is constructed from Vt−1\mathcal V_{t-1}Vt−1​, not quantified over.
  • Maxima are Finset.sup' over nonempty finite sets, or IsGreatest.
  • SE(b,a,o)SE(b, a, o)SE(b,a,o) is the zero vector when Pr⁡(o∣a,b)=0\Pr(o \mid a, b) = 0Pr(o∣a,b)=0 (division by zero). Every use either assumes Pr⁡≠0\Pr \ne 0Pr=0 or multiplies by Pr⁡\PrPr.

The following encodings would make the theorem trivial or false, and are excluded: comparing trees by equality instead of by value function, letting bbb range over all of RS\mathbb R^SRS, taking Qta\mathcal Q^a_tQta​ to be an arbitrary set, allowing Ua=∅U_a = \emptysetUa​=∅, and defining the true Q-function as Q^ta\hat Q^a_tQ^​ta​ itself.

Contributions are welcome at every level. The parsimonious-representation lemma (milestone 3) is the reusable geometric core. The subtree-swap lemma and the Q-function identity are the algebraic core.

Selected references

  • L. P. Kaelbling, M. L. Littman, A. R. Cassandra, Planning and acting in partially observable stochastic domains, Artificial Intelligence 101(1–2):99–134, 1998. https://doi.org/10.1016/S0004-3702(98)00023-X
  • R. D. Smallwood, E. J. Sondik, The optimal control of partially observable Markov processes over a finite horizon, Operations Research 21(5):1071–1088, 1973. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.21.5.1071
  • K. J. Åström, Optimal control of Markov processes with incomplete state information, Journal of Mathematical Analysis and Applications 10:174–205, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1016/0022-247X(65)90154-X
  • A. R. Cassandra, M. L. Littman, N. L. Zhang, Incremental pruning: a simple, fast, exact method for partially observable Markov decision processes, UAI 1997. https://arxiv.org/abs/1302.1525
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Control TheoryDynamical SystemsOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Homogeneous Approximation, Recursive Observer Design, and Output Feedback: Global Asymptotic Stabilization of a Chain of Integrators by a Homogeneous-in-the-Bi-Limit Output FeedbackResearch Paper

Motivation

Many nonlinear control systems behave like a chain of integrators, x˙1=x2,…,x˙n=u\dot x_1=x_2,\dots,\dot x_n=ux˙1​=x2​,…,x˙n​=u, with additional terms that are small either near the origin or far from it. Designs based on weighted homogeneity handle such systems by making the closed loop invariant under a dilation, which gives robustness to perturbations that are dominated by the homogeneous part (Rosier, Homogeneous Lyapunov function for homogeneous continuous vector field, Systems & Control Letters, 1992, doi:10.1016/0167-6911(92)90078-7). A single homogeneous approximation, however, describes the system only at one scale. A perturbation that is negligible near the origin may dominate at infinity, and a design tuned to the origin can then fail globally.

Andrieu, Praly and Astolfi (arXiv:0903.0298v1; SIAM J. Control Optim., 2008, doi:10.1137/060675861) introduce homogeneity in the bi-limit: a function or vector field has one homogeneous approximation near the origin and another, possibly with different weights and degree, at infinity. They develop the basic calculus of this notion, a converse Lyapunov theorem for it, a recursive observer and a recursive state feedback for the chain of integrators, and combine them into a global output feedback. This mission formalizes that output-feedback result and the chain of results it rests on.

Setting

For a weight r=(r1,…,rn)r=(r_1,\dots,r_n)r=(r1​,…,rn​) with all ri>0r_i>0ri​>0 and λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, the dilation is λr⋄x=(λr1x1,…,λrnxn)\lambda^r\diamond x=(\lambda^{r_1}x_1,\dots,\lambda^{r_n}x_n)λr⋄x=(λr1​x1​,…,λrn​xn​). A continuous function ϕ:Rn→R\phi:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rϕ:Rn→R is homogeneous in the 0-limit with triple (r0,d0,ϕ0)(r_0,d_0,\phi_0)(r0​,d0​,ϕ0​), degree d0≥0d_0\ge0d0​≥0, if ϕ0\phi_0ϕ0​ is continuous and not identically zero and, for every compact C⊆Rn∖{0}C\subseteq\mathbb R^n\setminus\{0\}C⊆Rn∖{0} and every ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0, there is λ0>0\lambda_0>0λ0​>0 such that

max⁡x∈C∣ϕ(λr0⋄x)λd0−ϕ0(x)∣≤εfor all λ∈(0,λ0].\max_{x\in C}\left|\frac{\phi(\lambda^{r_0}\diamond x)}{\lambda^{d_0}}-\phi_0(x)\right|\le\varepsilon\qquad\text{for all }\lambda\in(0,\lambda_0].x∈Cmax​​λd0​ϕ(λr0​⋄x)​−ϕ0​(x)​≤εfor all λ∈(0,λ0​].

Homogeneity in the ∞-limit with triple (r∞,d∞,ϕ∞)(r_\infty,d_\infty,\phi_\infty)(r∞​,d∞​,ϕ∞​) is the same statement for all λ≥λ∞\lambda\ge\lambda_\inftyλ≥λ∞​. A vector field f=(f1,…,fn)f=(f_1,\dots,f_n)f=(f1​,…,fn​) is homogeneous with triple (r,d,f0)(r,\mathfrak d,f_0)(r,d,f0​), d∈R\mathfrak d\in\mathbb Rd∈R, when each fif_ifi​ is homogeneous with triple (r,d+ri,f0,i)(r,\mathfrak d+r_i,f_{0,i})(r,d+ri​,f0,i​) and d+ri≥0\mathfrak d+r_i\ge0d+ri​≥0. Bi-limit means both at once.

For the chain of integrators, Snx=(x2,…,xn,0)TS_n x=(x_2,\dots,x_n,0)^TSn​x=(x2​,…,xn​,0)T and Bn=(0,…,0,1)TB_n=(0,\dots,0,1)^TBn​=(0,…,0,1)T. Given degrees d0,d∞∈(−1,1n−1)\mathfrak d_0,\mathfrak d_\infty\in(-1,\frac1{n-1})d0​,d∞​∈(−1,n−11​), the weights are

r0,i=1−d0(n−i),r∞,i=1−d∞(n−i),i=1,…,n.r_{0,i}=1-\mathfrak d_0(n-i),\qquad r_{\infty,i}=1-\mathfrak d_\infty(n-i),\qquad i=1,\dots,n .r0,i​=1−d0​(n−i),r∞,i​=1−d∞​(n−i),i=1,…,n.

The output feedback studied is

x˙=Snx+Bnu,y=x1,X^˙n=L(SnX^n+Bnϕn(X^n)+K1(x1−x^1)),u=Lnϕn(X^n),\dot x=S_nx+B_nu,\quad y=x_1,\qquad \dot{\hat{\mathfrak X}}_n=L\bigl(S_n\hat{\mathfrak X}_n+B_n\phi_n(\hat{\mathfrak X}_n)+K_1(x_1-\hat x_1)\bigr),\quad u=L^n\phi_n(\hat{\mathfrak X}_n),x˙=Sn​x+Bn​u,y=x1​,X^˙n​=L(Sn​X^n​+Bn​ϕn​(X^n​)+K1​(x1​−x^1​)),u=Lnϕn​(X^n​),

with a gain L>0L>0L>0, a state feedback ϕn:Rn→R\phi_n:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rϕn​:Rn→R and an output-injection vector field K1:Rn→RnK_1:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R^nK1​:Rn→Rn, where K1(s)K_1(s)K1​(s) means K1(s,0,…,0)K_1(s,0,\dots,0)K1​(s,0,…,0). Its homogeneous approximations are the same closed loop with (ϕn,0,K1,0)(\phi_{n,0},K_{1,0})(ϕn,0​,K1,0​) and with (ϕn,∞,K1,∞)(\phi_{n,\infty},K_{1,\infty})(ϕn,∞​,K1,∞​) in place of (ϕn,K1)(\phi_n,K_1)(ϕn​,K1​).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.1

For n≥2n\ge2n≥2 and d0,d∞∈(−1,1n−1)\mathfrak d_0,\mathfrak d_\infty\in(-1,\frac1{n-1})d0​,d∞​∈(−1,n−11​) there exist ϕn\phi_nϕn​, homogeneous in the bi-limit with triples (r0,1+d0,ϕn,0)(r_0,1+\mathfrak d_0,\phi_{n,0})(r0​,1+d0​,ϕn,0​) and (r∞,1+d∞,ϕn,∞)(r_\infty,1+\mathfrak d_\infty,\phi_{n,\infty})(r∞​,1+d∞​,ϕn,∞​), and K1K_1K1​, homogeneous in the bi-limit with triples (r0,d0,K1,0)(r_0,\mathfrak d_0,K_{1,0})(r0​,d0​,K1,0​) and (r∞,d∞,K1,∞)(r_\infty,\mathfrak d_\infty,K_{1,\infty})(r∞​,d∞​,K1,∞​), such that

∀L>0:0∈R2n is globally asymptotically stable for the closed loop and for both of its homogeneous approximations.\forall L>0:\quad 0\in\mathbb R^{2n}\text{ is globally asymptotically stable for the closed loop and for both of its homogeneous approximations.}∀L>0:0∈R2n is globally asymptotically stable for the closed loop and for both of its homogeneous approximations.

The pair (ϕn,K1)(\phi_n,K_1)(ϕn​,K1​) is fixed before LLL. No constant appears in the goal.

Milestones

  1. Proposition 2.10 (composition) and Proposition 2.12 (integration along a coordinate) preserve homogeneity in the limit.
  2. Lemma 2.13: for homogeneous η\etaη and γ≥0\gamma\ge0γ≥0 with η<0\eta<0η<0 where γ=0\gamma=0γ=0, η−cγ<0\eta-c\gamma<0η−cγ<0 off the origin for all large ccc, simultaneously for both approximations.
  3. Theorem 2.20: a converse Lyapunov theorem, giving a C1C^1C1 proper Lyapunov function whose gradient is homogeneous in the bi-limit.
  4. Theorem 3.1 and display (3.12): the recursive observer, an output injection K1K_1K1​ making E˙=SnE+K1(e1)\dot E=S_nE+K_1(e_1)E˙=Sn​E+K1​(e1​) and its approximations globally asymptotically stable.
  5. Theorem 4.1 and display (4.9): the recursive state feedback, a ϕn\phi_nϕn​ making X˙=SnX+Bnϕn(X)\dot{\mathfrak X}=S_n\mathfrak X+B_n\phi_n(\mathfrak X)X˙=Sn​X+Bn​ϕn​(X) and its approximations globally asymptotically stable.

Significance

The theorem gives a single dynamic output feedback for the chain of integrators that is homogeneous with prescribed degrees near the origin and at infinity, and that stabilizes globally for every gain L>0L>0L>0. Because the degrees at the two ends are independent, the same design can be matched to perturbations of different orders at small and large amplitudes; the paper derives from it output-feedback stabilizers for systems in feedback and feedforward form (Corollaries 5.2 and 5.3), which are outside this mission. The converse Lyapunov theorem (Theorem 2.20) and the key lemma (Lemma 2.13) are general tools for any vector field homogeneous in the bi-limit.

The results are proved in the paper; none of them, nor the notion of homogeneity in the bi-limit, has a machine-checked proof. The platform has a definition of global asymptotic stability for continuous vector fields (from the series on Chitour, Ushirobira, Efimov and Perruquetti's prescribed-time stabilization) and Mathlib has the needed analysis, but there is no converse Lyapunov theorem and no theory of weighted homogeneous vector fields. A complete formalization would supply both.

Difficulty

Lyapunov arguments for homogeneous systems usually compare a function with its homogeneous approximation on the unit sphere and then scale. With homogeneity in the bi-limit the comparison holds only for small or for large dilation parameters, with no control at intermediate scales, and the two approximations have different weights, so no single dilation brings the whole space to a compact set. Each statement has to hold for the system and for both approximations at once. Theorem 2.20 additionally requires a converse Lyapunov theorem for continuous, non-Lipschitz vector fields whose solutions need not be unique, so a flow map is not available. Finally, the gain LLL in the goal is arbitrary: an argument that only works for LLL large enough proves a weaker statement.

Formalization scope

Points of Rn\mathbb R^nRn are functions Fin n → ℝ, with the paper's coordinate xix_ixi​ at index i−1i-1i−1; the closed loop lives on Fin (n + n) → ℝ with xxx first and X^n\hat{\mathfrak X}_nX^n​ second. Real powers are Real.rpow; the signed power is wr=sign⁡(w)∣w∣rw^r=\operatorname{sign}(w)|w|^rwr=sign(w)∣w∣r. Every clause of Definitions 2.1, 2.3 and 2.5 is kept: positive weights, nonnegative function degrees, continuity, approximating functions not identically zero, uniformity on compact subsets of Rn∖{0}\mathbb R^n\setminus\{0\}Rn∖{0}. Dropping any of them makes the goal weaker than the paper's.

Global asymptotic stability reuses the published ChitourPrescribedTime.FixedTime.GloballyAsymptoticallyStable on the Euclidean space, applied to the time-invariant field: the origin is an equilibrium, every initial state has a solution on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞), and stability and uniform attractivity hold for every solution. The mission adds that no solution escapes to infinity in finite time, so that every solution is covered; for continuous autonomous fields this is the textbook notion. Positive and negative definiteness, properness (V→∞V\to\inftyV→∞ along the cocompact filter), C1C^1C1 and partial derivatives (Fréchet derivative on a basis vector) are defined in the mission's definition files.

Corrections and readings, each disclosed in the item concerned:

  • Proposition 2.10 is false as printed. The composite approximation ζ0∘ϕ0\zeta_0\circ\phi_0ζ0​∘ϕ0​ can vanish identically, and in the ∞-limit a degree-0 outer function fails. Both extra hypotheses are added.
  • (5.2) prints K1(x1−x^1)K_1(x_1-\hat x_1)K1​(x1​−x^1​) while (3.3) and (5.9) use x^1−x1\hat x_1-x_1x^1​−x1​. The goal keeps the printed sign; since K1K_1K1​ is existential, the two readings are equivalent.
  • In Theorem 3.1 the hypothesis "GAS for these systems" covers (3.5) and both approximations, as the proof uses. In Theorem 4.1 the implicit ψi0,ψi∞\psi_{i0},\psi_{i\infty}ψi0​,ψi∞​ are existential C1C^1C1 functions, and αi+1>1\alpha_{i+1}>1αi+1​>1 is kept as printed. (4.4) and (4.9) lack the time-derivative dots.

A formalization in which the closed loop is replaced by its linearization, the homogeneity predicate is weakened to pointwise convergence, or the quantifier on LLL is moved before ϕn\phi_nϕn​ and K1K_1K1​, proves a different statement and does not close the goal. Contributions welcome: a library of weighted dilations and homogeneous functions, the converse Lyapunov theorem, and proofs of the milestones in any order.

Selected references

  • V. Andrieu, L. Praly, A. Astolfi, Homogeneous Approximation, Recursive Observer Design, and Output Feedback, arXiv:0903.0298v1, 2009 (SIAM J. Control Optim. 47(4), 2008). https://arxiv.org/abs/0903.0298
  • L. Rosier, Homogeneous Lyapunov function for homogeneous continuous vector field, Systems & Control Letters 19(6), 1992. https://doi.org/10.1016/0167-6911(92)90078-7
  • A. Bacciotti, L. Rosier, Liapunov Functions and Stability in Control Theory, Springer, 2nd ed., 2005. https://doi.org/10.1007/b139028
12 thms1 active userReviewed
CombinatoricsGraph TheoryProbability+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Inapproximability of Edge-Disjoint Paths and Low Congestion Routing on Undirected Graphs: A Random Hypergraph Instance Gives the Flow Relaxation an Integrality Gap of β₁/(4c) at Congestion c − 1Research Paper

Motivation

In the edge-disjoint paths problem (EDP) one is given an undirected graph and a list of source–sink pairs, and asks how many pairs can be connected simultaneously by paths that share no edge. Its relaxation EDP with congestion (EDPwC) allows every edge to carry up to a fixed number of paths. Both are central problems of network routing and of approximation algorithms, and the standard algorithmic tool for them is the multicommodity flow relaxation: a linear program that may split each pair's unit of demand fractionally over many paths. Rounding this LP is how most approximation algorithms for routing work, so the ratio between its optimum and the best integral routing, the integrality gap, bounds what any LP-based algorithm can achieve.

Without congestion the gap of this relaxation can be as large as Ω(V)\Omega(\sqrt V)Ω(V​) (Chekuri–Khanna–Shepherd 2006), and the question is how much a small congestion helps. Andrews, Chuzhoy, Guruswami, Khanna, Talwar and Zhang (Combinatorica 2010) proved hardness of approximation for EDPwC (their Theorems 1 and 2) and, independently and unconditionally, that the gap of the relaxation remains (log⁡V)Ω(1/c)(\log V)^{\Omega(1/c)}(logV)Ω(1/c) even when the integral solution may use congestion c−1c-1c−1 (their Theorem 5). In particular, for every fixed integer iii the gap between (1/i)(1/i)(1/i)-integral and fractional multicommodity flow in undirected graphs is superconstant. This mission formalizes Theorem 5 for EDPwC.

Setting

Fix integers n≥1n\ge1n≥1 and c≥2c\ge2c≥2. Write log⁡\loglog for log⁡2\log_2log2​ and ln⁡\lnln for the natural logarithm, and set

β1=14(log⁡n150(log⁡log⁡n)2)1/c,β2=6(2β1)c−1ln⁡β1.\beta_1=\frac14\Big(\frac{\log n}{150(\log\log n)^2}\Big)^{1/c},\qquad \beta_2=6(2\beta_1)^{c-1}\ln\beta_1 .β1​=41​(150(loglogn)2logn​)1/c,β2​=6(2β1​)c−1lnβ1​.

A random ccc-uniform hypergraph HHH on the vertex set {0,…,n−1}\{0,\dots,n-1\}{0,…,n−1} has m=⌊β2n⌋m=\lfloor\beta_2 n\rfloorm=⌊β2​n⌋ hyperedges h0,…,hm−1h_0,\dots,h_{m-1}h0​,…,hm−1​, chosen independently, each uniformly among the ccc-element subsets of the vertices.

From HHH one builds a graph G=G(H)G=G(H)G=G(H). For every hyperedge hih_ihi​ it has two vertices ℓi,ri\ell_i,r_iℓi​,ri​ joined by a special edge; for every vertex vvv of HHH it has a source s(v)s(v)s(v) and a sink t(v)t(v)t(v). If vvv lies in the hyperedges hi1,…,hikh_{i_1},\dots,h_{i_k}hi1​​,…,hik​​ with i1<⋯<iki_1<\dots<i_ki1​<⋯<ik​, the regular edges (s(v),ℓi1)(s(v),\ell_{i_1})(s(v),ℓi1​​), (rij,ℓij+1)(r_{i_j},\ell_{i_{j+1}})(rij​​,ℓij+1​​) for 1≤j<k1\le j<k1≤j<k, and (rik,t(v))(r_{i_k},t(v))(rik​​,t(v)) are added. The canonical path of vvv is P(v)=(s(v),ℓi1,ri1,…,ℓik,rik,t(v))P(v)=(s(v),\ell_{i_1},r_{i_1},\dots,\ell_{i_k},r_{i_k},t(v))P(v)=(s(v),ℓi1​​,ri1​​,…,ℓik​​,rik​​,t(v)); it crosses the special edge of every hyperedge containing vvv. The EDP instance has one pair (s(v),t(v))(s(v),t(v))(s(v),t(v)) for each vvv.

A feasible fractional solution puts flow f(P)∈[0,1]f(P)\in[0,1]f(P)∈[0,1] on s(v)s(v)s(v)–t(v)t(v)t(v) paths PPP, with routed amount xv=∑Pf(P)≤1x_v=\sum_P f(P)\le1xv​=∑P​f(P)≤1 for each pair and at most one unit of flow through each edge; its value is ∑vxv\sum_v x_v∑v​xv​. An integral routing with congestion at most c−1c-1c−1 connects a set of pairs, each by one path, so that every edge lies on at most c−1c-1c−1 of these paths; its value is the number of connected pairs.

The analysis uses three events of HHH: E1\mathcal E_1E1​, that some set of n/β1n/\beta_1n/β1​ vertices contains no hyperedge; E2\mathcal E_2E2​, that more than n/β1n/\beta_1n/β1​ vertices lie in more than 10β2c10\beta_2c10β2​c hyperedges; and E3(g)\mathcal E_3(g)E3​(g), that the graph G′G'G′ obtained from GGG by contracting every special edge has more than (6β2c2)g+1(6\beta_2c^2)^{g+1}(6β2​c2)g+1 cycles of length at most ggg.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5 for EDPwC, in the explicit form of Section 2

There are absolute constants α>0\alpha>0α>0 and N0N_0N0​ such that for all n≥N0n\ge N_0n≥N0​ and all integers ccc with 2≤c≤αlog⁡log⁡n/log⁡log⁡log⁡n2\le c\le\alpha\log\log n/\log\log\log n2≤c≤αloglogn/logloglogn some hypergraph HHH as above satisfies

∃ fractional solution of G(H) of value ncandevery congestion-(c−1) routing of G(H) routes ≤4nβ1 pairs,\exists\ \text{fractional solution of } G(H)\ \text{of value } \frac nc\qquad\text{and}\qquad \text{every congestion-}(c-1)\text{ routing of } G(H)\ \text{routes}\ \le\frac{4n}{\beta_1}\ \text{pairs},∃ fractional solution of G(H) of value cn​andevery congestion-(c−1) routing of G(H) routes ≤β1​4n​ pairs,

so the integrality gap is at least β1/(4c)\beta_1/(4c)β1​/(4c). The paper's Theorem 5 states this as Ω(1c(log⁡V/(log⁡log⁡V)2)1/(c+1))\Omega\big(\frac1{c}(\log V/(\log\log V)^2)^{1/(c+1)}\big)Ω(c1​(logV/(loglogV)2)1/(c+1)) for congestion ccc and VVV vertices; the goal keeps the paper's own Section 2 parameters, which fix the instance and leave the constants α,N0\alpha,N_0α,N0​ open.

Milestones

Lemma 6, Lemma 7 and Lemma 8 (Pr⁡[E1],Pr⁡[E2],Pr⁡[E3(g)]≤14\Pr[\mathcal E_1],\Pr[\mathcal E_2],\Pr[\mathcal E_3(g)]\le\frac14Pr[E1​],Pr[E2​],Pr[E3​(g)]≤41​); the joint good event of Section 2.4; the fractional solution of value n/cn/cn/c; and the three bounds of the gap analysis, ∣P1∣≤n/β1|\mathcal P_1|\le n/\beta_1∣P1​∣≤n/β1​ (canonical paths), ∣P2∣≤n/β1|\mathcal P_2|\le n/\beta_1∣P2​∣≤n/β1​ (long non-canonical paths), ∣P3∣≤n/β1+2gc(6β2c2)2g+2|\mathcal P_3|\le n/\beta_1+2gc(6\beta_2c^2)^{2g+2}∣P3​∣≤n/β1​+2gc(6β2​c2)2g+2 (short non-canonical paths), combined into ∣P′∣≤4n/β1|\mathcal P'|\le4n/\beta_1∣P′∣≤4n/β1​.

Significance

The result shows that the multicommodity flow relaxation cannot certify a constant-factor approximation for undirected EDPwC with any constant congestion: against integral solutions of congestion c−1c-1c−1 its gap is at least (log⁡V)Ω(1/c)(\log V)^{\Omega(1/c)}(logV)Ω(1/c). Any algorithm that compares its output with this LP inherits the bound. It complements the paper's hardness results, which hold only under a complexity assumption. The instance is a short explicit construction from a random hypergraph, so the theorem is also a statement in probabilistic combinatorics: random sparse uniform hypergraphs are, with constant probability, simultaneously "covering" (no large hyperedge-free set), of bounded degree, and nearly free of short cycles.

The result is proved in the paper; to our knowledge it has no machine-checked proof. The mission produces one: a formal model of the path LP and of congestion-bounded integral routings on simple graphs, reusable for other routing gaps; a formal random-hypergraph model with first-moment and Chernoff-type estimates; and the deterministic gap analysis. Variants with better constants, or the stronger statement that at least a quarter of all hypergraphs work, are welcome as additional results.

Difficulty

The fractional side and the bound on canonical routings are short. The difficulty lies in two places. First, Lemma 8 bounds the expected number of short cycles of G′G'G′; the adjacency of G′G'G′ depends on all hyperedges at once (consecutiveness along each vertex's sequence), and the obvious estimate through the intersection graph of HHH fails, because many hyperedges through a common vertex form a clique there. What keeps the count small is the order structure of each vertex's hyperedge sequence, which the intersection graph forgets. Second, the bound on short non-canonical paths requires turning two distinct routing paths of a pair into a short cycle of the contracted graph and charging it with the congestion constraint. Finally, the closing estimate 2gc(6β2c2)2g+2≤n/β12gc(6\beta_2c^2)^{2g+2}\le n/\beta_12gc(6β2​c2)2g+2≤n/β1​ holds only for large nnn in the stated range of ccc, and the printed chain for it is not literally correct, so the asymptotics have to be done afresh.

Formalization scope

Vertices of HHH are Fin n, hyperedges are indexed by Fin m with m=⌊β2n⌋m=\lfloor\beta_2n\rfloorm=⌊β2​n⌋, and HHH is an element of Fin m → {s : Finset (Fin n) // s.card = c}; probabilities are normalized counts over this finite set (uniform measure, which is independence of the hyperedges). The conventions are:

  • log⁡=log⁡2\log=\log_2log=log2​ and ln⁡\lnln is natural; β1\beta_1β1​ uses a real 1/c1/c1/c-th power.
  • The paper's integers β2n\beta_2nβ2​n, n/β1n/\beta_1n/β1​ (bad-set size) and g=3β1β2c2g=3\beta_1\beta_2c^2g=3β1​β2​c2 are ⌊β2n⌋\lfloor\beta_2n\rfloor⌊β2​n⌋, ⌈n/β1⌉\lceil n/\beta_1\rceil⌈n/β1​⌉ and ⌈3β1β2c2⌉\lceil3\beta_1\beta_2c^2\rceil⌈3β1​β2​c2⌉; the thresholds n/β1n/\beta_1n/β1​, 4n/β14n/\beta_14n/β1​, 10β2c10\beta_2c10β2​c, (6β2c2)g+1(6\beta_2c^2)^{g+1}(6β2​c2)g+1 stay real.
  • "For sufficiently large nnn" and c≤O(log⁡log⁡n/log⁡log⁡log⁡n)c\le O(\log\log n/\log\log\log n)c≤O(loglogn/logloglogn) become absolute constants N0N_0N0​ and α\alphaα, quantified before nnn and ccc. Lemma 8 and the deterministic bounds carry instead the explicit inequalities on β1,β2\beta_1,\beta_2β1​,β2​ their arguments use.
  • G(H)G(H)G(H) is a simple graph (coinciding regular edges are one edge). A vertex in no hyperedge gets the edge (s(v),t(v))(s(v),t(v))(s(v),t(v)), the k=0k=0k=0 case of its canonical path; the page leaves this case out.
  • KgK_gKg​ counts cycles of G′G'G′, each once as an edge set; the paper's definition says "in GGG", its proof and use say G′G'G′.
  • Routing paths are paths (no repeated vertex); lengths count edges of G(H)G(H)G(H); canonicity is equality of vertex sequences.

The goal cannot be met by an unrelated graph: the instance must be G(H)G(H)G(H) for a hypergraph with exactly ⌊β2n⌋\lfloor\beta_2n\rfloor⌊β2​n⌋ hyperedges of size ccc on nnn vertices, the fractional solution must respect xv≤1x_v\le1xv​≤1 and capacity 111, and the integral bound is over all routings of congestion c−1c-1c−1.

Not in scope: the ANFwC half of Theorem 5, the remark on a superconstant gap at c=Θ(log⁡log⁡V/(log⁡log⁡log⁡V)2)c=\Theta(\log\log V/(\log\log\log V)^2)c=Θ(loglogV/(logloglogV)2), and the hardness results of Sections 3–5 (Theorems 1 and 2, Corollaries 3 and 4).

A complete development needs Chernoff and Markov bounds for counting measures, binomial-coefficient estimates, cycle extraction from two distinct paths in a simple graph, and the asymptotic estimates for β1,β2\beta_1,\beta_2β1​,β2​. The routing and LP definitions and the cycle-extraction lemma are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • M. Andrews, J. Chuzhoy, V. Guruswami, S. Khanna, K. Talwar, L. Zhang, Inapproximability of Edge-Disjoint Paths and Low Congestion Routing on Undirected Graphs, Combinatorica 30(5), 485–520, 2010. https://doi.org/10.1007/s00493-010-2455-9
  • C. Chekuri, S. Khanna, F. B. Shepherd, An O(n)O(\sqrt n)O(n​) approximation and integrality gap for disjoint paths and unsplittable flow, Theory of Computing 2, 137–146, 2006. https://doi.org/10.4086/toc.2006.v002a007
12 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStatistics·Captain: mikedeng1

Simulation Output Analysis Using Standardized Time Series 2: Every STS Interval Has liminf n^{1/2} E Lₙ ≥ 2σΦ⁻¹(1 − δ/2)Research Paper

Why expected interval length matters

A simulation run often estimates a steady-state mean without producing independent observations. A confidence interval must account for dependence in the output, and the relevant variance constant may be unknown. Standardized time series (STS) methods use the shape of an integrated output path to cancel that constant rather than estimating it separately. The resulting interval can be computed from one run, but its length can vary substantially with the chosen standardizing functional. Glynn and Iglehart introduced a common functional framework for these methods and asked how short their expected intervals can be as the run grows. Their 1990 paper identifies a universal lower bound.

The comparison is operational. A shorter confidence interval conveys a more precise estimate at the same nominal coverage. The authors also compare STS with procedures that consistently estimate the variance constant. They state that the lower bound is attained by the latter procedures and approached, but not attained, by STS intervals. The present mission isolates the bound for STS itself, Corollary 4.16. It does not make the claim that a particular STS rule attains it. This distinction follows the paper's introduction and §4.

The stochastic setting

Let Y(t)Y(t)Y(t) be a real simulation output process for t≥0t\ge0t≥0. Its integrated average path at run length nnn is Y‾n(t)=n−1∫0ntY(s) ds\overline Y_n(t)=n^{-1}\int_0^{nt}Y(s)\,dsYn​(t)=n−1∫0nt​Y(s)ds for 0≤t≤10\le t\le10≤t≤1. The unknown steady-state mean is μ\muμ. The paper assumes a functional central limit theorem in the space C[0,1]C[0,1]C[0,1] of continuous real paths:

Xn(t):=n(Y‾n(t)−μt) ⇒ σB(t),σ>0,X_n(t):=\sqrt n\bigl(\overline Y_n(t)-\mu t\bigr) \ \Rightarrow\ \sigma B(t),\qquad \sigma>0,Xn​(t):=n​(Yn​(t)−μt) ⇒ σB(t),σ>0,

where BBB is standard Brownian motion. Convergence is weak convergence of random continuous paths in the uniform topology. This is Assumption (2.1), rather than a claim that every output process satisfies it. The paper lists several classes of processes for which such a theorem is available under further conditions (§2, pp. 2–3).

An STS scale functional g:C[0,1]→Rg:C[0,1]\to\mathbb Rg:C[0,1]→R belongs to M\mathcal MM when it is measurable, positively homogeneous, unchanged by subtracting any multiple of the identity path k(t)=tk(t)=tk(t)=t, positive at BBB almost surely, and continuous at BBB almost surely. The last two conditions ensure that the Brownian ratio is a meaningful distributional limit. The paper also describes these functionals through the bridge map (Γx)(t)=x(t)−tx(1)(\Gamma x)(t)=x(t)-t x(1)(Γx)(t)=x(t)−tx(1): a member of M\mathcal MM can be written as b∘Γb\circ\Gammab∘Γ for a suitable bbb. Thus the scale is determined by a Brownian bridge while the endpoint B(1)B(1)B(1) is independent of it (Propositions 2.7–2.8).

Define H(x)=P{B(1)/g(B)≤x}H(x)=P\{B(1)/g(B)\le x\}H(x)=P{B(1)/g(B)≤x}. For a confidence level 1−δ1-\delta1−δ, choose endpoints α,β\alpha,\betaα,β with H(β)−H(α)=1−δH(\beta)-H(\alpha)=1-\deltaH(β)−H(α)=1−δ. The STS confidence interval from equation (2.10) has endpoints Y‾n(1)−g(Y‾n)β\overline Y_n(1)-g(\overline Y_n)\betaYn​(1)−g(Yn​)β and Y‾n(1)−g(Y‾n)α\overline Y_n(1)-g(\overline Y_n)\alphaYn​(1)−g(Yn​)α. Its length is Ln=g(Y‾n)(β−α)L_n=g(\overline Y_n)(\beta-\alpha)Ln​=g(Yn​)(β−α). Here δ\deltaδ lies strictly between zero and one; the endpoint equation is part of the construction, not an arbitrary choice.

Formalization target

The goal is Corollary 4.16 for every nonnegative g∈Mg\in\mathcal Mg∈M under Assumption (2.1). Write Φ\PhiΦ for the standard normal distribution function and p=Φ−1(1−δ/2)p=\Phi^{-1}(1-\delta/2)p=Φ−1(1−δ/2). Then

lim inf⁡n→∞n E[Ln] ≥ 2σp=2σΦ−1(1−δ/2).\liminf_{n\to\infty}\sqrt n\,E[L_n] \ \ge\ 2\sigma p =2\sigma\Phi^{-1}(1-\delta/2).n→∞liminf​n​E[Ln​] ≥ 2σp=2σΦ−1(1−δ/2).

The expectation and liminf admit +∞+\infty+∞. The statement does not impose an integrability assumption that would remove that case. It quantifies over every admissible STS functional and every interval whose endpoints have the specified Brownian confidence mass (Corollary 4.16, p. 12).

Three substantial targets precede the corollary. Proposition 4.1(a) relates scaled expected length to σE[g(B)](β−α)\sigma E[g(B)](\beta-\alpha)σE[g(B)](β−α). Proposition 4.3 says a symmetric choice of α,β\alpha,\betaα,β minimizes β−α\beta-\alphaβ−α. Theorem 4.8 gives E[g(B)]Φg−1(1−δ/2)≥Φ−1(1−δ/2)E[g(B)]\Phi^{-1}_g(1-\delta/2)\ge\Phi^{-1}(1-\delta/2)E[g(B)]Φg−1​(1−δ/2)≥Φ−1(1−δ/2), where Φg−1\Phi^{-1}_gΦg−1​ denotes the quantile of HHH. The milestone list also includes the cited Brownian independence, mixture distribution, scale invariance, and continuous mapping statements that put these targets in context.

What the bound establishes

The corollary supplies a benchmark for the asymptotic expected length of any interval in this STS class. A proposed standardizing functional cannot beat the normal-quantile constant while retaining the stated functional limit and confidence construction. It also identifies the quantity against which the paper's other interval procedures can be compared. The bound applies uniformly to the class M\mathcal MM, not to a chosen batch size or a particular form of ggg (Glynn–Iglehart 1990, §4).

The mathematical result has been proved in the source paper. This mission supplies formal statements and their shared definitions as proof targets; it does not claim that their Lean proofs already exist. A complete development would formalize the known arguments for the milestones and corollary, including the Brownian path representation, weak convergence, quantile properties, and expectation inequalities. Those components could be reused in other work on simulation output analysis and ratios of weakly convergent processes.

Where the formal proof is demanding

Weak convergence alone does not imply convergence of expectations. In particular, a continuous mapping limit for g(Xn)g(X_n)g(Xn​) cannot simply be integrated as an ordinary finite real expectation when the family is not uniformly integrable. Proposition 4.1(a) asks only for a lower bound, and its statement must still account for E[g(B)]=+∞E[g(B)]=+\inftyE[g(B)]=+∞. This is why the goal is expressed with a liminf and extended nonnegative expectations rather than a real-valued limit. A separate difficulty is that the interval width depends jointly on a distributional scale and a choice of two quantiles. Bounding either one in isolation does not state the corollary.

Formalization scope and conventions

Paths are Mathlib's C([0,1],R)C([0,1],\mathbb R)C([0,1],R) with its uniform metric and Borel sigma algebra. A standard Brownian motion is a measurable random continuous path agreeing with an R≥0\mathbb R_{\ge0}R≥0​-indexed real Brownian motion on [0,1][0,1][0,1]. The paper's discontinuity set D(g)D(g)D(g) is the set where ggg is not continuous. Assumption (2.1) includes joint measurability of YYY and finite-interval pathwise integrability so that each integrated average is defined. The path Y‾n\overline Y_nYn​ is supplied together with its defining integral equation, which determines it pointwise. Its values are not free parameters.

Indices nnn are natural numbers. At n=0n=0n=0, the average uses Lean's total division and is zero; this initial value does not affect an asymptotic statement. The positive Brownian scale σ\sigmaσ is finite. The parameters satisfy 0<δ<10<\delta<10<δ<1, and H(β)−H(α)=1−δH(\beta)-H(\alpha)=1-\deltaH(β)−H(α)=1−δ. The normal and STS quantiles appear as real parameters pinned by their distribution-function equations, avoiding an unbounded or empty real infimum. Expected nonnegative lengths and scales are integrals valued in R≥0∪{+∞}\mathbb R_{\ge0}\cup\{+\infty\}R≥0​∪{+∞}. The class N\mathcal NN explicitly requires measurability of bbb, the standing convention needed for its equality with M\mathcal MM.

The corollary retains the entire class M\mathcal MM and Assumption (2.1), with g≥0g\ge0g≥0 on all continuous paths. It cannot be replaced by a statement about a single easy functional or by assuming the bound on an auxiliary criterion. Useful contributions include the Brownian bridge independence theorem, the normal scale-mixture identity, distribution-function regularity, and the asymptotic expectation result.

Selected references

  • P. W. Glynn and D. L. Iglehart, Simulation output analysis using standardized time series, Mathematics of Operations Research 15(1):1–16, 1990. DOI: 10.1287/moor.15.1.1.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
Algorithmic Game TheoryConvex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Cooperative Fuzzy Games 2: A Game with Side Payments Has a Nonempty Core Iff It Is Balanced, and Then Its Core Is the Core of Its Concave Fuzzy ExtensionResearch Paper

Why cores of games with side payments

A cooperative game with side payments assigns to each coalition of players the total payoff it can secure on its own and share freely among its members. The core is the set of ways of dividing the payoff of the grand coalition that no coalition can improve upon. It is the basic stability notion of cooperative game theory and of its applications in operations research: cost allocation for shared facilities, network design, inventory pooling and linear production games all ask whether a core allocation exists and what it looks like.

The core can be empty, and the question of when it is not was answered independently by Bondareva (1963) and Shapley (1967): the core is nonempty exactly when the game is balanced, a linear-programming condition on weighted families of coalitions. Scarf (1967) extended the existence half to games without side payments, and Billera (1970) recast balancedness for those games.

Aubin's Cooperative Fuzzy Games (Math. Oper. Res. 6(1), 1981) reads these results through fuzzy coalitions, in which each player participates at a rate between 0 and 1. In §6 every game on a family of coalitions is extended to a concave positively homogeneous function of fuzzy coalitions, and the Bondareva–Shapley theorem becomes a statement about that extension. This mission formalizes §2 and §6 of the paper: the core of a fuzzy game with side payments, its superdifferential description, and Proposition 6.1.

Setting

Let N={1,…,n}N=\{1,\dots,n\}N={1,…,n} be the set of players. A coalition A⊆NA\subseteq NA⊆N is identified with its characteristic vector τA∈{0,1}n\tau^A\in\{0,1\}^nτA∈{0,1}n, and τN=(1,…,1)\tau^N=(1,\dots,1)τN=(1,…,1). A fuzzy coalition is a vector τ∈[0,1]n\tau\in[0,1]^nτ∈[0,1]n, where τi\tau_iτi​ is the rate at which player iii participates.

A fuzzy game with side payments is a worth function vvv with v(0)=0v(0)=0v(0)=0 that is positively homogeneous, v(tτ)=t v(τ)v(t\tau)=t\,v(\tau)v(tτ)=tv(τ) for t>0t>0t>0. Homogeneity extends vvv from [0,1]n[0,1]^n[0,1]n to the orthant R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​. Its core is

core⁡(v)={c∈Rn: ∑i∈Nci=v(τN),  ∑i∈Nτici≥v(τ) for all τ∈[0,1]n},\operatorname{core}(v)=\Big\{c\in\mathbb R^n:\ \sum_{i\in N}c_i=v(\tau^N),\ \ \sum_{i\in N}\tau_ic_i\ge v(\tau)\ \text{for all }\tau\in[0,1]^n\Big\},core(v)={c∈Rn: i∈N∑​ci​=v(τN),  i∈N∑​τi​ci​≥v(τ) for all τ∈[0,1]n},

the allocations that no fuzzy coalition blocks. The superdifferential of vvv at τ\tauτ is ∂v(τ)={c: v(τ)−v(σ)≥∑ici(τi−σi) for all σ∈R+n}\partial v(\tau)=\{c:\ v(\tau)-v(\sigma)\ge\sum_i c_i(\tau_i-\sigma_i)\ \text{for all }\sigma\in\mathbb R^n_+\}∂v(τ)={c: v(τ)−v(σ)≥∑i​ci​(τi​−σi​) for all σ∈R+n​}.

A usual game with side payments is given by a family C\mathscr CC of nonempty coalitions that contains NNN and every singleton {i}\{i\}{i}, and by a worth v(A)∈Rv(A)\in\mathbb Rv(A)∈R for each A∈CA\in\mathscr CA∈C. Its core is the set of c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn with ∑i∈Nci=v(N)\sum_{i\in N}c_i=v(N)∑i∈N​ci​=v(N) and ∑i∈Aci≥v(A)\sum_{i\in A}c_i\ge v(A)∑i∈A​ci​≥v(A) for every A∈CA\in\mathscr CA∈C. For τ∈R+n\tau\in\mathbb R^n_+τ∈R+n​, C(τ)\mathscr C(\tau)C(τ) is the set of nonnegative weights m(A)m(A)m(A), A∈CA\in\mathscr CA∈C, with ∑A∋im(A)=τi\sum_{A\ni i}m(A)=\tau_i∑A∋i​m(A)=τi​ for each player iii, and

πv(τ)=sup⁡m∈C(τ) ∑A∈Cm(A) v(A).\pi v(\tau)=\sup_{m\in\mathscr C(\tau)}\ \sum_{A\in\mathscr C}m(A)\,v(A).πv(τ)=m∈C(τ)sup​ A∈C∑​m(A)v(A).

The game is balanced if πv(τN)=v(N)\pi v(\tau^N)=v(N)πv(τN)=v(N).

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 6.1

core⁡(v)≠∅  ⟺  πv(τN)=v(N),and thencore⁡(v)=core⁡(πv).\operatorname{core}(v)\neq\emptyset\iff \pi v(\tau^N)=v(N),\qquad\text{and then}\qquad \operatorname{core}(v)=\operatorname{core}(\pi v).core(v)=∅⟺πv(τN)=v(N),and thencore(v)=core(πv).

The first half is the Bondareva–Shapley theorem for an arbitrary family C\mathscr CC. The second identifies the core of the discrete game with the core of the fuzzy game πv\pi vπv.

Milestones

  1. §2 (4)–(5). For a positively homogeneous vvv with v(0)=0v(0)=0v(0)=0, core⁡(v)=∂v(τN)\operatorname{core}(v)=\partial v(\tau^N)core(v)=∂v(τN).
  2. Remark 2.1. Such a vvv is concave on R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​ if and only if it is superadditive, v(τ+σ)≥v(τ)+v(σ)v(\tau+\sigma)\ge v(\tau)+v(\sigma)v(τ+σ)≥v(τ)+v(σ).
  3. Proposition 2.1. If vvv is moreover concave, its core is convex, compact and nonempty; if vvv is differentiable at τN\tau^NτN, the core is {Dv(τN)}\{Dv(\tau^N)\}{Dv(τN)}.
  4. §6 (5). If m∈C(τ)m\in\mathscr C(\tau)m∈C(τ) and m(A)>0m(A)>0m(A)>0, then A⊆Aτ={i:τi>0}A\subseteq A_\tau=\{i:\tau_i>0\}A⊆Aτ​={i:τi​>0}.
  5. §6 (2). πv\pi vπv is the smallest concave positively homogeneous function on R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​ with πv(τA)≥v(A)\pi v(\tau^A)\ge v(A)πv(τA)≥v(A) for every A∈CA\in\mathscr CA∈C.
  6. §6, after (6). The core of the fuzzy game πv\pi vπv is nonempty, convex and compact, whether or not vvv is balanced.

Significance

Proposition 6.1 is the standard criterion for the existence of core allocations in transferable-utility games. In operations research it is the tool behind core results for linear production games, flow games, facility location and inventory games: one exhibits a family of balancing weights, or the absence of one, and reads off whether a stable cost or profit allocation exists. Aubin's version adds that a balanced game's core is the superdifferential of a concave function, so it is described by convex analysis and, when πv\pi vπv is smooth at τN\tau^NτN, reduces to a single point given by the gradient.

The result is classical and proved in the literature. To our knowledge, no machine-checked proof of the Bondareva–Shapley theorem exists in Mathlib or on this platform: the platform has results on cores of convex (supermodular) games, which are a different hypothesis. The mission therefore produces a first formal proof of the theorem for a general family C\mathscr CC of coalitions, the superdifferential description of the fuzzy core, and the minimality of the concave extension πv\pi vπv. The definitions (fuzzy coalitions, balances, πv\pi vπv) are reusable by later missions on games without side payments and on values of fuzzy games.

Difficulty

The inclusion core⁡(v)⊆core⁡(πv)\operatorname{core}(v)\subseteq\operatorname{core}(\pi v)core(v)⊆core(πv) and the necessity of balancedness are short computations with the balancing weights. The difficulty is sufficiency: from πv(τN)=v(N)\pi v(\tau^N)=v(N)πv(τN)=v(N), a core allocation has to be produced. This is an existence statement for a system of linear inequalities, and it needs a duality or separation argument. Mathlib's finite-dimensional linear programming duality and separation theorems do not apply off the shelf, because πv\pi vπv is a supremum over a polytope of weights indexed by coalitions, and its attainment and finiteness must be established first. Proposition 2.1 similarly needs the existence of supergradients of a concave function at an interior point and their compactness, which are not packaged for functions defined only on an orthant.

Formalization scope

Players are Fin n; multiutilities and fuzzy coalitions are Fin n → ℝ with the coordinatewise order, and the cube is Set.Icc 0 1. The commitments are:

  • A fuzzy game is a function on Rn\mathbb R^nRn whose values off the orthant are never used; v(0)=0v(0)=0v(0)=0 and homogeneity for every t>0t>0t>0 and τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0 are hypotheses of every §2 statement, because §2 states them once for the whole section. Concavity is concavity on R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​.
  • In the superdifferential (5), σ\sigmaσ ranges over R+n\mathbb R^n_+R+n​, the domain of the extended vvv; the paper leaves this implicit.
  • "Differentiable at τN\tau^NτN" is DifferentiableAt at the interior point (1,…,1)(1,\dots,1)(1,…,1), and Dv(τN)Dv(\tau^N)Dv(τN) is the vector of partial derivatives.
  • The family C\mathscr CC contains NNN and all singletons and excludes ∅\emptyset∅; the core and πv\pi vπv use only coalitions in C\mathscr CC, so v(∅)=0v(\emptyset)=0v(∅)=0 plays no role. Because N∈CN\in\mathscr CN∈C and ∅∉C\emptyset\notin\mathscr C∅∈/C, the family exists only for n≥1n\ge1n≥1.
  • πv\pi vπv is a real supremum. For τ≥0\tau\ge0τ≥0 the set of values is nonempty and bounded above, so the value is the paper's; off the orthant the set is empty and the value is never used.
  • The printed v(C)v(\mathscr C)v(C) and τC\tau^{\mathscr C}τC in §6 (2)–(3) are read as v(A)v(A)v(A) and τA\tau^AτA, as §6 (4) settles.

Balancedness is the equation πv(τN)=v(N)\pi v(\tau^N)=v(N)πv(τN)=v(N) with πv\pi vπv built from the balances of §6 (3)–(4); a formalization that defines "balanced" through the core, or takes πv\pi vπv to be an envelope already known to agree with the core, makes the goal empty and is ruled out. Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, a general Bondareva–Shapley lemma for finite families of coalitions, and supergradient existence for concave functions on convex sets with nonempty interior.

Selected references

  • J.-P. Aubin, Cooperative Fuzzy Games, Mathematics of Operations Research 6(1), 1981, 1–13. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.6.1.1
  • O. N. Bondareva, Some applications of linear programming methods to the theory of cooperative games, Problemy Kibernetiki 10, 1963, 119–139 (in Russian; no stable online copy).
  • L. S. Shapley, On balanced sets and cores, Naval Research Logistics Quarterly 14(4), 1967, 453–460. https://doi.org/10.1002/nav.3800140404
  • H. E. Scarf, The core of an N person game, Econometrica 35(1), 1967, 50–69. https://doi.org/10.2307/1909703
  • L. J. Billera, Some theorems on the core of an n-person game without side-payments, SIAM Journal on Applied Mathematics 18(3), 1970, 567–579. https://doi.org/10.1137/0118007
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Machine LearningOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Smart "Predict, then Optimize": Under a Continuous, Centrally Symmetric Cost Law Every Minimizer of the SPO+ Risk Equals E[c|x] and Minimizes the SPO RiskResearch Paper

Motivation

Many decisions are made before their objective coefficients are known. A planner may know the feasible decisions and the form of a linear optimization problem, but must predict its cost vector from available features. Squared prediction error measures how close a forecast is to the eventual coefficients; it need not measure the quality of the decision chosen with that forecast. Elmachtoub and Grigas define a loss based on the excess realized cost of the resulting decision, then introduce a convex surrogate, SPO+, for training prediction rules Elmachtoub and Grigas, 2020, §§2–3.

The central population question is whether minimizing the surrogate still selects predictions that minimize the decision loss when the full data distribution is available. Their Theorem 1 answers this under conditions on the feasible region and the conditional distribution of costs Elmachtoub and Grigas, 2020, p. 21. The result concerns the loss itself, before sample size, model capacity, or an algorithm for fitting a predictor enter the picture.

Setting

A feasible region S⊆RdS\subseteq\mathbb R^dS⊆Rd is nonempty, compact, and convex. Given a cost vector c∈Rdc\in\mathbb R^dc∈Rd, a decision w∈Sw\in Sw∈S incurs cost c⊤wc^\top wc⊤w. The nominal value, optimal-decision set, and support function are

z∗(c)=min⁡w∈Sc⊤w,W∗(c)=arg⁡min⁡w∈Sc⊤w,ξS(c)=max⁡w∈Sc⊤w.z^*(c)=\min_{w\in S}c^\top w,\qquad W^*(c)=\arg\min_{w\in S}c^\top w,\qquad \xi_S(c)=\max_{w\in S}c^\top w.z∗(c)=w∈Smin​c⊤w,W∗(c)=argw∈Smin​c⊤w,ξS​(c)=w∈Smax​c⊤w.

An optimization oracle w∗w^*w∗ returns one element of W∗(c)W^*(c)W∗(c) for each ccc, without a tie-breaking rule. For a predicted cost c^\hat cc^ and realized cost ccc, the unambiguous SPO loss uses the worst realized decision among all decisions optimal for the prediction:

ℓSPO(c^,c)=max⁡w∈W∗(c^)c⊤w−z∗(c).\ell_{\mathrm{SPO}}(\hat c,c) =\max_{w\in W^*(\hat c)}c^\top w-z^*(c).ℓSPO​(c^,c)=w∈W∗(c^)max​c⊤w−z∗(c).

This is Definition 2 of the paper. Its SPO+ loss, Definition 3, is

ℓSPO+(c^,c)=ξS(c−2c^)+2c^⊤w∗(c)−z∗(c).\ell_{\mathrm{SPO+}}(\hat c,c) =\xi_S(c-2\hat c)+2\hat c^\top w^*(c)-z^*(c).ℓSPO+​(c^,c)=ξS​(c−2c^)+2c^⊤w∗(c)−z∗(c).

The factor 222 is fixed by the paper's surrogate. Proposition 3 states that SPO+ upper-bounds SPO, is convex in c^\hat cc^, and has the explicit subgradient 2(w∗(c)−w∗(2c^−c))2(w^*(c)-w^*(2\hat c-c))2(w∗(c)−w∗(2c^−c)) Elmachtoub and Grigas, 2020, pp. 17–18.

Let xxx denote an observed feature, ν\nuν its probability law, and κx\kappa_xκx​ the conditional law of ccc given xxx. Their joint law is D=ν⊗κD=\nu\otimes\kappaD=ν⊗κ. A measurable predictor fff maps each xxx to a cost prediction f(x)f(x)f(x). The population risks RSPO(f)R_{\mathrm{SPO}}(f)RSPO​(f) and RSPO+(f)R_{\mathrm{SPO+}}(f)RSPO+​(f) are expectations over (x,c)∼D(x,c)\sim D(x,c)∼D of the corresponding losses at (f(x),c)(f(x),c)(f(x),c), as in displays (11) and (12) Elmachtoub and Grigas, 2020, p. 20. There is no prescribed parametric predictor class.

Formalization targets

Theorem 1: Fisher consistency of SPO+

Write m(x)=E[c∣x]m(x)=\mathbb E[c\mid x]m(x)=E[c∣x]. Under Assumption 1, the optimal-decision set W∗(m(x))W^*(m(x))W∗(m(x)) is a singleton for almost every xxx; each conditional law is centrally symmetric about m(x)m(x)m(x) and continuous on all of Rd\mathbb R^dRd; and SSS has nonempty interior. The goal says that every measurable minimizer fff of SPO+ population risk satisfies

f(x)=m(x)for ν-almost every x,RSPO(f)≤RSPO(g)for every measurable g.f(x)=m(x)\quad\text{for }\nu\text{-almost every }x, \qquad R_{\mathrm{SPO}}(f)\le R_{\mathrm{SPO}}(g) \quad\text{for every measurable }g.f(x)=m(x)for ν-almost every x,RSPO​(f)≤RSPO​(g)for every measurable g.

This is the paper's Fisher-consistency statement, including its stronger identification of every SPO+ minimizer with the conditional mean Elmachtoub and Grigas, 2020, Theorem 1. The goal does not assert that a minimizer exists.

Supporting propositions

The milestone list follows the paper's numbered results: Proposition 3's pointwise upper bound, convexity, and subgradient; Proposition 6's mean minimizer and uniqueness claims for a single cost law; and both directions of Proposition 5, which relate SPO risk minimizers to decisions optimal at the mean Elmachtoub and Grigas, 2020, pp. 18, 22–23. The single-law propositions have no feature variable.

Significance

Theorem 1 identifies a condition under which a convex training objective preserves the population target of the decision loss. Its identification statement is stronger than merely saying that one selected SPO+ minimizer is SPO-optimal: all SPO+ minimizers agree almost surely with conditional mean cost. The propositions isolate what this depends on. Proposition 6 concerns the surrogate risk, while Proposition 5 connects a prediction's optimal-decision set to the true risk.

The result was proved in the cited preprint and published in Management Science in 2022; this mission asks for a Lean proof of that known result, not a new consistency theorem. A completed development would provide reusable definitions for cost-based decision losses and a checked account of the distributional assumptions needed for uniqueness. The published oracle predicate is already available on the platform; the two losses, risks, and distributional predicates are introduced here.

Difficulty

The SPO loss may jump when a predicted cost admits more than one optimal decision. Its definition takes the maximum realized cost over that whole decision set. Consequently, showing that a prediction selects one mean-optimal decision does not by itself control the SPO loss; Proposition 5's converse requires a singleton set. The surrogate is convex but generally not differentiable, because the support function of SSS need not be differentiable. Establishing the unique population minimizer also depends on how the cost law covers the space: absolute continuity by itself permits a bounded-support law for which nearby predictions tie. These are substantive issues in moving from the single-cost-law statements to an almost-sure claim about measurable predictors Elmachtoub and Grigas, 2020, §4 and Appendix B.

Formalization scope

The code represents Rd\mathbb R^dRd by EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d) and c⊤wc^\top wc⊤w by its standard inner product. Every theorem assumes the paper's nonempty compact convex SSS. Real infima and suprema encode the attained minima and maxima on SSS. An oracle is an explicit parameter satisfying the published SPOBounds.Natarajan.IsOracle predicate; it is not given an extra measurability or tie-breaking assumption. The SPO loss is the paper's unambiguous Definition 2, which differs from the oracle-dependent loss in the published module.

Expected losses are extended nonnegative integrals, so an infinite risk remains infinite. Conditional costs are represented by a Markov kernel κ\kappaκ, and the joint law by ν⊗κ\nu\otimes\kappaν⊗κ. Integrability of costs makes the conditional and joint means finite. Central symmetry means equality of the conditional law with its reflection c↦2m(x)−cc\mapsto 2m(x)-cc↦2m(x)−c. Assumption 1.3, “continuous on all of Rd\mathbb R^dRd,” is pinned to absolute continuity with respect to Lebesgue measure and full support, meaning every nonempty open set has positive probability. This full-support condition is needed for Proposition 6(b)'s uniqueness claim: a continuous law confined to a small ball supplies a counterexample to the weaker reading.

The risks range over all measurable predictors, as display (12) requires. A Bochner integral for an arbitrary nonintegrable loss, a restricted hypothesis class, the oracle-dependent SPO loss of Definition 1, or absolute continuity without full support would change or trivialize the target. Contributions to the support-function, measurable-risk, and conditional-law infrastructure are useful beyond this mission; the seven numbered proposition parts provide its immediate formalization targets.

Selected references

  • A. N. Elmachtoub and P. Grigas, Smart “Predict, then Optimize”, arXiv:1710.08005v5, 2020; published in Management Science 68(1), 2022. Preprint
10 thms1 active userReviewed
Bandit AlgorithmsMachine LearningProbability·Captain: mikedeng1

MNL-Bandit: A Dynamic Learning Approach to Assortment Selection II: Under a K-Cardinality Constraint Every Policy Has Regret at Least C√(NT/K)Research Paper

Motivation

A retailer with a large catalogue but a limited display (a web page, a shelf, a search result) must decide which assortment of products to show each arriving customer. Customers choose among the displayed products or leave without buying, and the retailer does not know their preferences in advance; it learns them only from the purchases it observes. This is the MNL-Bandit problem of Agrawal, Avadhanula, Goyal and Zeevi (arXiv:1706.03880v2; Operations Research 67(5), 2019), in which customer choices follow the multinomial logit model, the workhorse of revenue management and marketing.

The same paper gives an epoch-based upper-confidence-bound policy whose regret is at most of order NTlog⁡NT\sqrt{NT\log NT}NTlogNT​ (its Theorem 1). This mission formalizes the matching lower bound, the paper's Theorem 2: under a constraint that at most KKK products be displayed, no policy can have regret smaller than order NT/K\sqrt{NT/K}NT/K​ on every instance. Lower bounds of this kind are what certify that an algorithm is near-optimal rather than merely good.

Timeline. The square-root lower bound for NNN-armed bandits goes back to Auer, Cesa-Bianchi, Freund and Schapire (2002), presented in the survey of Bubeck and Cesa-Bianchi (arXiv:1204.5721, 2012). Rusmevichientong, Shen and Shmoys (2010) and Sauré and Zeevi (2013) minimized regret under MNL choice with explore-then-exploit policies, obtaining O(N2log⁡2T)O(N^2\log^2T)O(N2log2T) and O(Nlog⁡T)O(N\log T)O(NlogT) bounds for instances whose best and second-best assortments are well separated. Agrawal et al. (2017–2019) proved the instance-independent Ω(NT/K)\Omega(\sqrt{NT/K})Ω(NT/K​) lower bound formalized here; Chen and Wang (2017) later obtained Ω(NT)\Omega(\sqrt{NT})Ω(NT​) when K<N/4K<N/4K<N/4.

Setting

There are nnn products. An instance consists of a no-purchase weight v0>0v_0>0v0​>0, attraction parameters v1,…,vnv_1,\dots,v_nv1​,…,vn​ with 0≤vi≤v00\le v_i\le v_00≤vi​≤v0​, and revenues ri∈[0,1]r_i\in[0,1]ri​∈[0,1]. At each period t=1,…,Tt=1,\dots,Tt=1,…,T the seller offers an assortment St⊆{1,…,n}S_t\subseteq\{1,\dots,n\}St​⊆{1,…,n} and observes a choice ct∈St∪{0}c_t\in S_t\cup\{0\}ct​∈St​∪{0}, where 000 means no purchase. Under the multinomial logit (MNL) model,

pi(S)=viv0+∑j∈Svj(i∈S∪{0}),pi(S)=0 otherwise,p_i(S)=\frac{v_i}{v_0+\sum_{j\in S}v_j}\quad(i\in S\cup\{0\}),\qquad p_i(S)=0\ \text{otherwise},pi​(S)=v0​+∑j∈S​vj​vi​​(i∈S∪{0}),pi​(S)=0 otherwise,

and choices are independent across periods given the offered sets. The expected revenue of SSS is R(S,v)=∑i∈Srivi/(v0+∑j∈Svj)R(S,v)=\sum_{i\in S}r_iv_i/(v_0+\sum_{j\in S}v_j)R(S,v)=∑i∈S​ri​vi​/(v0​+∑j∈S​vj​).

A policy chooses StS_tSt​ from the past assortments and choices, possibly at random. It satisfies the KKK-cardinality constraint if ∣St∣≤K|S_t|\le K∣St​∣≤K always. Its regret over TTT periods is

Regπ(T,v)=Eπ(∑t=1TR(S∗,v)−R(St,v)),\mathrm{Reg}_\pi(T,v)=\mathbb E_\pi\Big(\sum_{t=1}^{T}R(S^*,v)-R(S_t,v)\Big),Regπ​(T,v)=Eπ​(t=1∑T​R(S∗,v)−R(St​,v)),

where S∗S^*S∗ maximizes R(⋅,v)R(\cdot,v)R(⋅,v) over assortments of at most KKK products.

A randomized instance is a probability distribution over instances with common known revenues and a common no-purchase weight; the regret against it is averaged over the hidden attraction parameters, the choices and the policy's randomization.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 14)

There is an absolute constant C>0C>0C>0 such that for all n≥2n\ge2n≥2, 1≤K≤n1\le K\le n1≤K≤n and T≥nT\ge nT≥n there is a finitely supported randomized instance, chosen before the policy, such that every policy π\piπ respecting the KKK-cardinality constraint satisfies

Ev[Regπ(T,v)]≥CnTK.\mathbb E_{v}\big[\mathrm{Reg}_\pi(T,v)\big]\ge C\sqrt{\frac{nT}{K}} .Ev​[Regπ​(T,v)]≥CKnT​​.

The constant is not fixed; any positive value suffices.

Milestones

The paper proves Theorem 2 in two cases.

  1. Lemma E.1 (p. 57): the Bernoulli divergence bound kl(α,α+ϵ)≤4ϵ2/α\mathrm{kl}(\alpha,\alpha+\epsilon)\le 4\epsilon^2/\alphakl(α,α+ϵ)≤4ϵ2/α in the direction used by Lemma E.2.
  2. Lemma E.2 (p. 57): for a guessing algorithm on N≥12N\ge12N≥12 coins and t≤Nα/(60ϵ2)t\le N\alpha/(60\epsilon^2)t≤Nα/(60ϵ2), at least N/3N/3N/3 hiding places jjj of the biased coin have Pj(at=j)≤1/2\mathcal P_j(a_t=j)\le 1/2Pj​(at​=j)≤1/2.
  3. Lemma 5.1 (p. 15): on the Bernoulli instance IMABI_{\mathrm{MAB}}IMAB​ with ϵ=1100Nα/T\epsilon=\frac1{100}\sqrt{N\alpha/T}ϵ=1001​Nα/T​, every online algorithm has expected regret at least ϵT/6\epsilon T/6ϵT/6.
  4. Lemma E.4 (p. 60): one period of MNL feedback on the instance I^MNL\hat I_{\mathrm{MNL}}I^MNL​, where ϵ=1/(32T)\epsilon=\sqrt{1/(32T)}ϵ=1/(32T)​, has divergence at most 4ϵ24\epsilon^24ϵ2.
  5. Lemma E.5 (p. 61): over TTT periods the two choice laws of that instance have divergence at most 4Tϵ24T\epsilon^24Tϵ2.

Items 1–3 serve the case K<nK<nK<n, which the paper reduces to a multi-armed bandit through the instance IMNLI_{\mathrm{MNL}}IMNL​ of Definition 5.2 (NKNKNK products in NNN groups of KKK, one hidden group with larger attraction). Items 4–5 serve the case K=nK=nK=n through the two-point instance I^MNL\hat I_{\mathrm{MNL}}I^MNL​ of Definition E.1.

Significance

The theorem shows that the T\sqrt{T}T​ growth of regret in assortment learning cannot be improved, and that the dependence on the number of products is polynomial: when the display size KKK is fixed, the UCB policy of the same paper is optimal up to logarithmic factors (Remark 4). It separates what learning under the MNL model costs from what the combinatorics of the assortment adds, and the reduction it uses, simulating an assortment algorithm inside a bandit algorithm, is reusable for other choice-model bandits.

The result is proved in the paper, with its proof in Appendix E. To our knowledge neither the theorem nor its lemmas have been machine-checked. A formal proof has to repair several printed slips: Lemma 5.1's hypotheses do not exclude α\alphaα close to 111, where the bound fails; the proof of Lemma E.2 uses a form of Pinsker's inequality with a wrong constant; Lemma E.1 states one direction of the divergence and computes the other; and the constants of the K=NK=NK=N case do not match. The formal statements here carry the corrected hypotheses, each disclosed in its note.

Difficulty

The obvious argument fails at the reduction. The bandit lower bound is a statement about algorithms that pull one arm per round, while an assortment policy offers KKK products at once and sees a choice among them. Transferring the bound requires simulating MNL feedback from Bernoulli coins (Algorithm 2 of the paper), whose loop has a random length, and then relating the regret of the simulated assortment algorithm over a random number of calls to the bandit regret over TTT pulls. The paper does this in expectation, and the constants have to be tracked through the random horizon.

A second difficulty is that the lower bound must hold for every policy, including randomized ones, against a single randomized instance fixed in advance. Bounding the regret of each deterministic policy separately is not enough unless the instance does not depend on the policy, which the statement requires. The change-of-measure steps (Lemmas E.2 and E.5) need a chain rule for the divergence between laws of adaptively generated histories.

Formalization scope

Products, periods and arms are 0-based (Fin n); a choice is Option (Fin n) with none the no-purchase alternative. Histories have finite length TTT, laws of histories are explicit products of policy weights and MNL (or Bernoulli) probabilities, and every expectation is a finite sum, so no measurability or integrability side conditions arise. The no-purchase weight v0v_0v0​ is explicit (Definition 5.2 has v0=Kv_0=Kv0​=K). R(S∗,v)R(S^*,v)R(S∗,v) is a maximum over the finite, nonempty family {S:∣S∣≤K}\{S:|S|\le K\}{S:∣S∣≤K}.

Policies are behavioural: at every history they give a probability vector over assortments, which by Kuhn's theorem covers the paper's admissible policies with external randomization. The randomized instance is a finite list of instances with nonnegative weights summing to one; every support point has the same revenues and no-purchase weight, which are known to the seller. The quantifiers are in the paper's order: the constant first, then n,K,Tn,K,Tn,K,T, then the randomized instance, then every policy. A formalization with the policy quantified before the instance, with C=0C=0C=0 allowed, with varying known revenues across hidden support points, or with only deterministic policies, would be weaker and is ruled out.

Hypotheses added to the printed statements: n≥2n\ge2n≥2 and K≥1K\ge1K≥1 in Theorem 2 (the claim fails for n=1n=1n=1 and K=0K=0K=0); 0<α0<\alpha0<α, 0<ϵ0<\epsilon0<ϵ, α+ϵ≤3/4\alpha+\epsilon\le3/4α+ϵ≤3/4 in Lemma E.1; 0<α0<\alpha0<α, 0<ϵ0<\epsilon0<ϵ, 2α+ϵ≤12\alpha+\epsilon\le12α+ϵ≤1 in Lemma E.2; 0<α0<\alpha0<α, 2α+ϵ≤12\alpha+\epsilon\le12α+ϵ≤1, T≥1T\ge1T≥1 in Lemma 5.1. Lemmas E.4 and E.5 use Definition E.1's ϵ=1/(32T)\epsilon=\sqrt{1/(32T)}ϵ=1/(32T)​, with T≥1T\ge1T≥1 and n≥2n\ge2n≥2 so the instance is defined. Lemma E.5 is stated, as in its proof, for deterministic policies.

The development reuses three published definitions: the MNL revenue ChoiceCDLP.MNL.mnlObjective, the Bernoulli divergence RegretBandits.Stochastic.klBern, and the discrete Kullback–Leibler divergence FoundationsRL.GeneralDM.klDivDiscrete (valued in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]). Proved platform results useful to solvers include Pinsker's inequality (BanditAlgorithm.pinsker_inequality_total_variation), the Bernoulli bound d(p,q)≤(q−p)2/(p(2−p−q))d(p,q)\le(q-p)^2/(p(2-p-q))d(p,q)≤(q−p)2/(p(2−p−q)) (BanditAlgorithm.bernoulli_relative_entropy_le_sq_div_of_add_le_one) and a divergence decomposition for bandits. A chain rule for the divergence of finite adaptive histories, and a formal version of the simulation of Algorithm 2, would be reusable beyond this mission; both are welcome as supporting lemmas.

Selected references

  • S. Agrawal, V. Avadhanula, V. Goyal, A. Zeevi, MNL-Bandit: A Dynamic Learning Approach to Assortment Selection, Operations Research 67(5):1453–1485, 2019; preprint arXiv:1706.03880v2. https://arxiv.org/abs/1706.03880 — DOI https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.2018.1832
  • S. Bubeck, N. Cesa-Bianchi, Regret Analysis of Stochastic and Nonstochastic Multi-armed Bandit Problems, Foundations and Trends in Machine Learning 5(1), 2012. https://arxiv.org/abs/1204.5721
  • P. Auer, N. Cesa-Bianchi, Y. Freund, R. E. Schapire, The Nonstochastic Multiarmed Bandit Problem, SIAM Journal on Computing 32(1), 2002. https://doi.org/10.1137/S0097539701398375
  • D. Sauré, A. Zeevi, Optimal Dynamic Assortment Planning with Demand Learning, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management 15(3), 2013. https://doi.org/10.1287/msom.2013.0429
  • X. Chen, Y. Wang, A Note on a Tight Lower Bound for MNL-Bandit Assortment Selection Models, arXiv:1709.06109, 2017. https://arxiv.org/abs/1709.06109
12 thms1 active userReviewed
OptimizationStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Finding Optimal (s, S) Policies Is About As Simple As Evaluating a Single Policy: The Zheng–Federgruen Algorithm Terminates with an Optimal (s, S) Policy and c⁰ = c*Research Paper

Motivation

The (s, S) policy is the standard control rule for a single item reviewed periodically: when the inventory position reaches or drops below a reorder level sss, order enough to bring it up to the order-up-to level SSS. Under a fixed ordering cost and fairly general holding and shortage costs, some (s, S) policy minimizes the long-run average cost among all policies (Veinott 1966). That makes computing the best (s, S) pair a routine subproblem in inventory software, in multi-echelon heuristics, and in textbooks.

Before 1991 the available methods searched a box of candidate pairs. Veinott and Wagner (1965) bounded the optimal sss and SSS and compared policies within the bounds. Later methods (Johnson, Management Science 15, 1968; Bell, SIAM J. Applied Mathematics 18, 1970; Federgruen and Zipkin 1984) used policy iteration or partial enumeration. Zheng and Federgruen (1991) gave an exact search that walks a monotone staircase path through the (s,S)(s,S)(s,S) grid, and showed it costs about as much as evaluating a single policy. The procedure is the one presented in standard inventory texts such as Zipkin's Foundations of Inventory Management (2000).

Setting

One-period demands DDD are i.i.d. and integer valued, with pj=Pr⁡{D=j}p_j=\Pr\{D=j\}pj​=Pr{D=j}, j≥0j\ge0j≥0, and p0<1p_0<1p0​<1. An order costs K>0K>0K>0. G(y)G(y)G(y) is the one-period expected cost when a period starts at inventory position y∈Zy\in\mathbb Zy∈Z. The paper assumes only:

  • −G-G−G is unimodal: for some integer mmm, GGG is nonincreasing on y≤my\le my≤m and nondecreasing on y≥my\ge my≥m;
  • lim⁡∣y∣→∞G(y)>min⁡yG(y)+K\lim_{|y|\to\infty}G(y)>\min_yG(y)+Klim∣y∣→∞​G(y)>miny​G(y)+K.

Write y1∗y_1^*y1∗​ and y2∗y_2^*y2∗​ for the smallest and largest minimizers of GGG. The renewal density mmm and renewal function MMM are

m(0)=(1−p0)−1,m(j)=∑l=0jpl m(j−l) (j≥1),M(0)=0,M(j)=M(j−1)+m(j−1).m(0)=(1-p_0)^{-1},\quad m(j)=\sum_{l=0}^{j}p_l\,m(j-l)\ (j\ge1),\qquad M(0)=0,\quad M(j)=M(j-1)+m(j-1).m(0)=(1−p0​)−1,m(j)=l=0∑j​pl​m(j−l) (j≥1),M(0)=0,M(j)=M(j−1)+m(j−1).

For integers s<Ss<Ss<S, the long-run average cost of the (s, S) policy is

c(s,S)=K+∑j=0S−s−1m(j) G(S−j)M(S−s).c(s,S)=\frac{K+\sum_{j=0}^{S-s-1}m(j)\,G(S-j)}{M(S-s)}.c(s,S)=M(S−s)K+∑j=0S−s−1​m(j)G(S−j)​.

A pair (s,S)(s,S)(s,S) is an optimal policy if c(s,S)≤c(s′,S′)c(s,S)\le c(s',S')c(s,S)≤c(s′,S′) for all integers s′<S′s'<S's′<S′. The optimal cost c∗c^*c∗ is the value of any optimal policy. For fixed SSS, sss is an optimal reorder level if c(s,S)≤c(s′,S)c(s,S)\le c(s',S)c(s,S)≤c(s′,S) for all s′<Ss'<Ss′<S.

The algorithm (§3, p. 659) starts at any minimizer y∗y^*y∗ of GGG.

  • Step 0. Decrease sss from y∗y^*y∗ until c(s,y∗)≤G(s)c(s,y^*)\le G(s)c(s,y∗)≤G(s). Set S0:=y∗S^0:=y^*S0:=y∗, c0:=c(s,S0)c^0:=c(s,S^0)c0:=c(s,S0) and S:=y∗+1S:=y^*+1S:=y∗+1.
  • Step 1. While G(S)≤c0G(S)\le c^0G(S)≤c0: if c(s,S)<c0c(s,S)<c^0c(s,S)<c0, set S0:=SS^0:=SS0:=S, increase sss while c(s,S0)≤G(s+1)c(s,S^0)\le G(s+1)c(s,S0)≤G(s+1), and set c0:=c(s,S0)c^0:=c(s,S^0)c0:=c(s,S0). In either case, S:=S+1S:=S+1S:=S+1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1(a)

For every demand law with p0<1p_0<1p0​<1, every K>0K>0K>0, every GGG satisfying the two assumptions, and every minimizer y∗y^*y∗ of GGG, the algorithm terminates. On termination, with final values s,S0,c0s,S^0,c^0s,S0,c0,

c(s,S0)≤c(s′,S′)  for all integers s′<S′,c0=c(s,S0)=c∗.c(s,S^0)\le c(s',S')\ \text{ for all integers } s'<S',\qquad c^0=c(s,S^0)=c^*.c(s,S0)≤c(s′,S′)  for all integers s′<S′,c0=c(s,S0)=c∗.

Milestones

The milestones are the results the paper's justification of the algorithm (p. 659) rests on, in the order it uses them:

  1. the weighted-average identity (6), c(s−1,S)=αnc(s,S)+(1−αn)G(s)c(s-1,S)=\alpha_nc(s,S)+(1-\alpha_n)G(s)c(s−1,S)=αn​c(s,S)+(1−αn​)G(s) with αn=M(n)/M(n+1)\alpha_n=M(n)/M(n+1)αn​=M(n)/M(n+1) and n=S−sn=S-sn=S−s, and Lemma 0 on the comparisons it implies;
  2. Lemma 1(a): a reorder level s0<y1∗s^0<y_1^*s0<y1∗​ with G(s0)≥c(s0,S)≥G(s0+1)G(s^0)\ge c(s^0,S)\ge G(s^0+1)G(s0)≥c(s0,S)≥G(s0+1) (condition (7)) is optimal for SSS;
  3. Corollary 1, the stopping rule of Step 0;
  4. Lemma 2(a)–(c), the bounds y2∗≤S∗y_2^*\le S^*y2∗​≤S∗ and S∗≤Sˉ∗=max⁡{y≥y2∗:G(y)≤c∗}S^*\le\bar S^*=\max\{y\ge y_2^*:G(y)\le c^*\}S∗≤Sˉ∗=max{y≥y2∗​:G(y)≤c∗}, which give the stopping rule of Step 1;
  5. Lemma 3(a), the single-comparison test for improvement, and Corollary 2(b) with Lemma 3(b), which justify the inner loop.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1(a) makes the exact optimum of the (s, S) problem as cheap to compute as the cost of one policy, for any GGG with −G-G−G unimodal. No convexity is needed, and lead times, random lead times of the Zipkin type, and linear purchase costs are allowed. Its bounds (Lemma 2) and the monotone staircase structure of the search also underlie later work on continuous review, discounting and approximation.

Formalizing it. The theorem is proved on paper. As far as we know, none of the results in this mission has a machine-checked proof: the platform's Veinott–Wagner items concern a different (discounted, convex) model. Formalizing it produces a verified correctness proof of a widely implemented algorithm, and checks the paper's lemmas at their edge cases. Two of the printed statements need repair: Lemma 1(b) and Lemma 3(a) (see the scope section).

Difficulty

Optimality is claimed over all pairs s′<S′s'<S's′<S′, an infinite set, but the algorithm visits only a monotone path. The proof therefore has to show that every pair it skips is no better. For a fixed SSS, the skipped reorder levels are handled by the unimodality of c(⋅,S)c(\cdot,S)c(⋅,S) (Lemma 1). The skipped order-up-to levels are handled by the one-comparison test of Lemma 3(a), and those above the stopping point by the bound of Lemma 2(b). An argument from joint convexity or joint unimodality of ccc in (s,S)(s,S)(s,S) is not available. The paper uses no structure of ccc beyond what Lemmas 0–3 state, and these hold only under the side conditions written in them.

Lemma 2(b)'s printed proof leaves the class of (s, S) policies (it uses a randomized order-up-to level). The limit at −∞-\infty−∞ may be finite, so min⁡s<Sc(s,S)\min_{s<S}c(s,S)mins<S​c(s,S) need not be attained for every SSS. Lattice demands, for which mmm vanishes somewhere, create ties between adjacent reorder levels. Each of these breaks a naive transcription of the paper's argument.

Formalization scope

  • Levels s,S,ys,S,ys,S,y are integers. Demand values are natural numbers, and the demand law is the published VeinottWagnerSS.RenewalCost.DemandDist with the extra hypothesis p0<1p_0<1p0​<1. All costs are real.
  • The cost is the ratio above. Equation (1) on p. 655 is misprinted as M(S−s)K+∑⋯M(S-s)K+\sum\cdotsM(S−s)K+∑⋯, and the ratio is the form fixed by (3) and (5). The Lean value c(s,S)c(s,S)c(s,S) for s≥Ss\ge Ss≥S is a junk 000, so every quantifier over reorder levels carries s<Ss<Ss<S.
  • mmm is defined by the solved recursion m(j)=(1−p0)−1∑l=1jpl m(j−l)m(j)=(1-p_0)^{-1}\sum_{l=1}^{j}p_l\,m(j-l)m(j)=(1−p0​)−1∑l=1j​pl​m(j−l) (p. 660), and M(j)=∑i<jm(i)M(j)=\sum_{i<j}m(i)M(j)=∑i<j​m(i).
  • The growth assumption is encoded as: GGG has a minimizer y0y_0y0​ and G(y)>G(y0)+KG(y)>G(y_0)+KG(y)>G(y0​)+K for all but finitely many yyy. Under unimodality this is equivalent to the page's limit condition. It is not strengthened to G→+∞G\to+\inftyG→+∞.
  • Optimality is among (s, S) policies. That an (s, S) policy is optimal among all policies is Veinott (1966) and is neither stated nor used. c∗c^*c∗, c∗(S)c^*(S)c∗(S), yi∗y_i^*yi∗​, Sˉ∗\bar S^*Sˉ∗, Sˉc\bar S_cSˉc​ and s′s's′ are never real infima: they are the cost of a given optimal pair, ∃\exists∃-statements, or binders characterised as least or greatest elements.
  • The algorithm is a step function on the state (s,S,S0,c0,phase)(s,S,S^0,c^0,\text{phase})(s,S,S0,c0,phase) that keeps the paper's order of tests and its weak and strict inequalities. The run with nnn steps returns an output only if the algorithm has terminated.
  • Ruled out as trivializing: comparing only with the pairs the algorithm visits or with a bounded box; assuming termination, or a budget that returns the current state; assuming G→+∞G\to+\inftyG→+∞; leaving c(s,S)c(s,S)c(s,S) unguarded for s≥Ss\ge Ss≥S.
  • Repaired statements. Lemma 3(a) is stated with condition (7) at S0S^0S0 as an extra hypothesis. With s0s^0s0 merely optimal it fails when mmm has a zero: for p=(1/5,0,1/5,3/5)p=(1/5,0,1/5,3/5)p=(1/5,0,1/5,3/5), m(1)=0m(1)=0m(1)=0 and adjacent reorder levels tie. The algorithm always has (7). Lemma 1(b), "an optimal reorder level satisfying (7) exists for every SSS", is false when lim⁡y→−∞G(y)\lim_{y\to-\infty}G(y)limy→−∞​G(y) is finite. An example is D≡2D\equiv2D≡2, K=1K=1K=1, G(0)=5G(0)=5G(0)=5, G(y)=10−0.1⋅2−∣y∣G(y)=10-0.1\cdot2^{-|y|}G(y)=10−0.1⋅2−∣y∣ (y≠0y\neq0y=0), S=1S=1S=1, where no optimal reorder level exists. It is not posed here, and the goal does not depend on it.
  • Not formalized: Theorem 1(b)–(c), the operation counts, which depend on a bookkeeping model described in words; Corollary 3, which the paper notes is not needed for the algorithm; and the variant for a general starting level S0S_0S0​.
  • Welcome contributions: general facts about the discrete renewal density (m≥0m\ge0m≥0, M>0M>0M>0), the identity (6), and lemmas on c(⋅,S)c(\cdot,S)c(⋅,S) that are reusable for related (s, S) and (r, Q) work.

Selected references

  • Y.-S. Zheng and A. Federgruen, Finding Optimal (s, S) Policies Is About As Simple As Evaluating a Single Policy, Operations Research 39(4):654–665, 1991. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.39.4.654
  • A. F. Veinott Jr. and H. M. Wagner, Computing Optimal (s, S) Inventory Policies, Management Science 11(5):525–552, 1965. https://doi.org/10.1287/mnsc.11.5.525
  • A. F. Veinott Jr., On the Optimality of (s, S) Inventory Policies: New Conditions and a New Proof, SIAM J. Applied Mathematics 14(5):1067–1083, 1966. https://doi.org/10.1137/0114086
  • A. Federgruen and P. Zipkin, An Efficient Algorithm for Computing Optimal (s, S) Policies, Operations Research 32(6):1268–1285, 1984. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.32.6.1268
  • A. Federgruen and Y.-S. Zheng, An Efficient Algorithm for Computing an Optimal (r, Q) Policy in Continuous Review Stochastic Inventory Systems, Operations Research 40(4):808–813, 1992. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.40.4.808
14 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Poisson Arrivals See Time Averages: Under Lack of Anticipation, the Fraction of Time in B Converges a.s. iff the Fraction of Arrivals Finding B Does, to the Same LimitResearch Paper

Why arrival averages and time averages agree

Queueing analysis constantly moves between two kinds of long-run averages: the fraction of time a system spends in some set of states, and the fraction of arriving customers who find it there. Waiting-time formulas for the M/G/1 queue, blocking probabilities in loss systems and many decomposition arguments rest on the claim that, when arrivals form a Poisson process, the two coincide. This property is known as PASTA, Poisson Arrivals See Time Averages. It is used throughout queueing theory, inventory theory and the analysis of communication networks, usually without proof.

Before 1982 the property had been proved under strong extra structure:

  • Strauch (1970) proved an instantaneous version, at a fixed time point, which does not by itself give limit theorems.
  • Wolff (1970) proved a limit theorem for a stationary observed process, using particular properties of its interaction with the Poisson stream.
  • Stidham (1972) proved a limit theorem for regenerative processes, under restrictions on how regeneration points relate to the arrivals.
  • Wolff (1982), the source of this mission, proved the limit theorem with no stationarity, regeneration or ergodicity at all. The only link assumed between system and arrivals is that the system does not anticipate future arrivals. The proof uses Watanabe's (1964) martingale characterization of the Poisson process.
  • Melamed and Whitt (1990) recast the result as one instance of a general "arrivals see time averages" (ASTA) principle for arbitrary point processes.

Setting

Let (Ω,F,P)(\Omega,\mathcal F,P)(Ω,F,P) be a probability space. On it live a process N={N(t),t≥0}N=\{N(t),t\ge0\}N={N(t),t≥0}, the state of a system, with values in an arbitrary measurable space, and a Poisson process A={A(t),t≥0}A=\{A(t),t\ge0\}A={A(t),t≥0} at rate λ>0\lambda>0λ>0, counting customer arrivals in (0,t](0,t](0,t]. The interaction between AAA and NNN is unspecified: arrivals may change the state.

Fix a set BBB of states with {N(t)∈B}∈F\{N(t)\in B\}\in\mathcal F{N(t)∈B}∈F for every t≥0t\ge0t≥0, and define

U(t)=1{N(t)∈B},V(t)=t−1∫0tU(s) ds,Y(t)=∫0tU(s) dA(s),Z(t)=Y(t)A(t).U(t)=\mathbf 1\{N(t)\in B\},\qquad V(t)=t^{-1}\int_0^tU(s)\,ds,\qquad Y(t)=\int_0^tU(s)\,dA(s),\qquad Z(t)=\frac{Y(t)}{A(t)}.U(t)=1{N(t)∈B},V(t)=t−1∫0t​U(s)ds,Y(t)=∫0t​U(s)dA(s),Z(t)=A(t)Y(t)​.

V(t)V(t)V(t) is the fraction of time in [0,t][0,t][0,t] that NNN is in BBB. Y(t)Y(t)Y(t) is the number of arrivals up to ttt who find NNN in BBB, and Z(t)Z(t)Z(t) is the fraction of arrivals who do.

The paths of UUU are assumed left continuous with right-hand limits w.p. 1, so that an arrival is not counted as already present at its own arrival epoch. UUU is assumed jointly measurable in (ω,t)∈Ω×[0,∞)(\omega,t)\in\Omega\times[0,\infty)(ω,t)∈Ω×[0,∞). The single structural assumption is the Lack of Anticipation Assumption (LAA):

for each t≥0t\ge0t≥0, {A(t+u)−A(t),u≥0}\{A(t+u)-A(t),u\ge0\}{A(t+u)−A(t),u≥0} and {U(s),0≤s≤t}\{U(s),0\le s\le t\}{U(s),0≤s≤t} are independent.

The paper's proof of (6) uses this independence for every event of Ft\mathcal F_tFt​, the σ-field generated by {A(s),U(s);0≤s≤t}\{A(s),U(s);0\le s\le t\}{A(s),U(s);0≤s≤t}. The mission therefore states Theorems 1–2, (6), Lemma 1, (10) and Lemma 2 under lack of anticipation with respect to Ft\mathcal F_tFt​: for each t≥0t\ge0t≥0, {A(t+u)−A(t),u≥0}\{A(t+u)-A(t),u\ge0\}{A(t+u)−A(t),u≥0} is independent of Ft\mathcal F_tFt​. This implies the printed LAA. The printed LAA together with independent increments does not give (6) or Lemma 1, because pairwise independence of the future from the past of AAA and from the past of UUU is not independence from their joint past.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 225)

Under lack of anticipation (with respect to Ft\mathcal F_tFt​, see above), for every random variable V(∞)V(\infty)V(∞),

V(t)→V(∞) w.p. 1⟺Z(t)→V(∞) w.p. 1,t→∞.V(t)\to V(\infty)\ \text{w.p. 1}\quad\Longleftrightarrow\quad Z(t)\to V(\infty)\ \text{w.p. 1},\qquad t\to\infty.V(t)→V(∞) w.p. 1⟺Z(t)→V(∞) w.p. 1,t→∞.

The limit may be random, and the theorem asserts nothing about whether either average converges. It asserts only that the two converge together, to the same limit.

Milestones

The proof in §2 passes through the following statements, which form the milestone list:

  1. (2), (3): E{Y(t)}=λtE{V(t)}=λE{∫0tU(s) ds}E\{Y(t)\}=\lambda tE\{V(t)\}=\lambda E\{\int_0^tU(s)\,ds\}E{Y(t)}=λtE{V(t)}=λE{∫0t​U(s)ds}.
  2. (6): E{Y(t+h)−Y(t)∣Ft}=λE{∫tt+hU(s) ds∣Ft}E\{Y(t+h)-Y(t)\mid\mathcal F_t\}=\lambda E\{\int_t^{t+h}U(s)\,ds\mid\mathcal F_t\}E{Y(t+h)−Y(t)∣Ft​}=λE{∫tt+h​U(s)ds∣Ft​}.
  3. Lemma 1: R(t)=Y(t)−λtV(t)R(t)=Y(t)-\lambda tV(t)R(t)=Y(t)−λtV(t) is a martingale.
  4. (7): the second-moment bound E{R2(t)}≤λt+2λ2t2E\{R^2(t)\}\le\lambda t+2\lambda^2t^2E{R2(t)}≤λt+2λ2t2.
  5. (10): the grid strong law R(nh)/n→0R(nh)/n\to0R(nh)/n→0 w.p. 1.
  6. (11): the pathwise interpolation bound between grid points.
  7. Lemma 2: R(t)/t→0R(t)/t\to0R(t)/t→0 w.p. 1.
  8. The strong law A(t)/t→λA(t)/t\to\lambdaA(t)/t→λ for the Poisson process.

Companion: Theorem 2 (p. 228)

For a Poisson process with bounded, integrable rate λ(t)\lambda(t)λ(t) and Λ(t)/t→λˉ∈(0,∞)\Lambda(t)/t\to\bar\lambda\in(0,\infty)Λ(t)/t→λˉ∈(0,∞), where Λ(t)=∫0tλ(s) ds\Lambda(t)=\int_0^t\lambda(s)\,dsΛ(t)=∫0t​λ(s)ds, the same equivalence holds with V(t)V(t)V(t) replaced by the rate-weighted average Vˉ(t)=Λ(t)−1∫0tU(s)λ(s) ds\bar V(t)=\Lambda(t)^{-1}\int_0^tU(s)\lambda(s)\,dsVˉ(t)=Λ(t)−1∫0t​U(s)λ(s)ds. Display (12), E{Y(t)}=∫0tE{U(s)}λ(s) dsE\{Y(t)\}=\int_0^tE\{U(s)\}\lambda(s)\,dsE{Y(t)}=∫0t​E{U(s)}λ(s)ds, is its analogue of (3).

Significance

Theorem 1 justifies replacing customer averages by time averages, and conversely, in any model where arrivals are Poisson and the system does not anticipate them. Examples are queue-length distributions seen by arrivals in M/G/c systems, blocking probabilities in Erlang loss models, and state probabilities at arrival epochs in networks with Poisson external input. It needs no ergodic theory of the observed process: convergence of one average has to be established separately, by whatever means suit the model, and the theorem transfers it to the other. Lemma 2 also implies versions of PASTA under weaker modes of convergence (Remark 6).

The result has been proved for four decades and is textbook material. What this mission adds is a machine-checked proof. No formalization of Theorem 1 in a proof assistant is known. A complete development would also contain machine-checked versions of several standard facts not yet available in Mathlib:

  • the strong law for the Poisson process;
  • a strong law for square-integrable martingale differences;
  • Stieltjes integration against a counting path.

Difficulty

The naive argument conditions on the arrival epochs and claims that each arrival "samples" the state at a uniformly random time. This fails because arrivals influence the state: after an arrival, a queue-length process is no longer independent of the arrival stream. LAA only says that the future increments of AAA are independent of the past of UUU. The difficulty is to turn this one-sided independence into an almost-sure statement about long-run averages, along every path and at all times rather than only at fixed ones.

On the technical side, the expected-value identity (3) needs a limit of grid sums. That limit relies on left continuity: without it, U(t)=1{A jumps at t}U(t)=\mathbf 1\{A \text{ jumps at } t\}U(t)=1{A jumps at t} satisfies LAA with V≡0V\equiv0V≡0 but Z≡1Z\equiv1Z≡1. The passage from expectations to a strong law needs a martingale structure and a second-moment bound, and the interpolation between grid times needs a pathwise argument.

Formalization scope

  • Time and paths. Time is R\mathbb RR, and every hypothesis concerns t≥0t\ge0t≥0 only. Processes are maps R→Ω→(⋅)\mathbb R\to\Omega\to(\cdot)R→Ω→(⋅). A Poisson process with intensity function λ(⋅)\lambda(\cdot)λ(⋅) is a counting process A:R→Ω→NA:\mathbb R\to\Omega\to\mathbb NA:R→Ω→N with A(0)=0A(0)=0A(0)=0, every path non-decreasing and right-continuous, Poisson-distributed increments with mean ∫stλ\int_s^t\lambda∫st​λ, and independent increments over any finite increasing sequence of times. The constant-rate case is Theorem 1's setting.
  • The averages. Y(t)Y(t)Y(t) is encoded as ∑k=1A(t)U(Tk)\sum_{k=1}^{A(t)}U(T_k)∑k=1A(t)​U(Tk​) over the arrival epochs Tk=inf⁡{s≥0:A(s)≥k}T_k=\inf\{s\ge0:A(s)\ge k\}Tk​=inf{s≥0:A(s)≥k}, which is the Lebesgue–Stieltjes integral ∫(0,t]U dA\int_{(0,t]}U\,dA∫(0,t]​UdA with multiplicities. Z(t)=0Z(t)=0Z(t)=0 when A(t)=0A(t)=0A(t)=0, and V(0)=0V(0)=0V(0)=0; limits do not see these values.
  • The standing hypotheses. These are carried as binders of the goal: measurability of {N(t)∈B}\{N(t)\in B\}{N(t)∈B} for t≥0t\ge0t≥0, path regularity w.p. 1 (left continuity at t>0t>0t>0, right limits at t≥0t\ge0t≥0), joint measurability on Ω×[0,∞)\Omega\times[0,\infty)Ω×[0,∞), and lack of anticipation as independence of the σ-field of future increments of AAA from Ft\mathcal F_tFt​. The milestones (2), (3), (7) and (11) need less: (2) and (3) are stated under the printed LAA, and (7) and (11) under no independence assumption at all.
  • The limit and the expectations. V(∞)V(\infty)V(∞) is an arbitrary function Ω→R\Omega\to\mathbb RΩ→R, shared by both sides of the equivalence. Expectations in the milestones come with integrability conclusions, or are lower integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so that no identity holds through Lean's junk value 000 for non-integrable functions.
  • Ruled out. A formalization in which V(∞)V(\infty)V(∞) is quantified separately on each side, which loses "to the same limit". A goal that assumes Lemma 2, (3) or the strong law A(t)/t→λA(t)/t\to\lambdaA(t)/t→λ as a hypothesis. A definition of YYY that counts distinct jump times and not arrivals.

Welcome contributions:

  • a reusable Poisson-process library: the strong law, square moments, independence of increments from a past σ-field;
  • a martingale strong law of Feller's type;
  • Stieltjes sums against counting paths.

All of these are useful well beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • R. W. Wolff, Poisson Arrivals See Time Averages, Operations Research 30(2):223–231, 1982. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.30.2.223
  • S. Watanabe, On discontinuous additive functionals and Lévy measures of a Markov process, Japanese Journal of Mathematics 34:53–70, 1964. https://doi.org/10.4099/jjm1924.34.0_53
  • B. Melamed and W. Whitt, On arrivals that see time averages, Operations Research 38(1):156–172, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.38.1.156
  • P. Brémaud and J. Jacod, Processus ponctuels et martingales: résultats récents sur la modélisation et le filtrage, Advances in Applied Probability 9(2):362–416, 1977. https://doi.org/10.2307/1426091
  • S. Stidham, Regenerative processes in the theory of queues, with applications to the alternating-priority queue, Advances in Applied Probability 4(3):542–577, 1972.
  • W. Feller, An Introduction to Probability Theory and Its Applications, Vol. II, 2nd ed., Wiley, 1971.
11 thms1 active userReviewed
PreviousPage 44 of 49Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me